Bull Power 5 User manual

Bull Power 5 User manual
Planning
REFERENCE
86 A1 04EW 00
ESCALA POWER5
Hardware
Information
BLANK
ESCALA POWER5
Hardware Information
Planning
Hardware
July 2006
BULL CEDOC
357 AVENUE PATTON
B.P.20845
49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01
FRANCE
REFERENCE
86 A1 04EW 00
The following copyright notice protects this book under Copyright laws which prohibit such actions as, but not
limited to, copying, distributing, modifying, and making derivative works.
Copyright
Bull SAS 1992, 2006
Printed in France
Suggestions and criticisms concerning the form, content, and presentation of this
book are invited. A form is provided at the end of this book for this purpose.
To order additional copies of this book or other Bull Technical Publications, you
are invited to use the Ordering Form also provided at the end of this book.
Trademarks and Acknowledgements
We acknowledge the right of proprietors of trademarks mentioned in this book.
AIX® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, and is being used under licence.
UNIX® is a registered trademark in the United States of America and other countries licensed exclusively through
the Open Group.
Linux® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Bull will not be liable for errors contained
herein, or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this material.
Planning
Table of Contents
Planning.............................................................................................................................................................1
Planning reference..................................................................................................................................2
Printable PDF.........................................................................................................................................2
Saving PDF files...............................................................................................................................2
Physical site planning and preparation...................................................................................................3
Site selection....................................................................................................................................4
Access..............................................................................................................................................4
Static electricity and floor resistance................................................................................................5
Space requirements.........................................................................................................................6
Floor construction and floor loading.................................................................................................6
Raised floors....................................................................................................................................6
Computer room layout......................................................................................................................9
Vibration and shock........................................................................................................................10
Lighting...........................................................................................................................................12
Acoustics........................................................................................................................................12
Electromagnetic compatibility.........................................................................................................13
Computer room location.................................................................................................................14
Material and data storage protection..............................................................................................15
Emergency planning for continuous operations.............................................................................16
General power information.............................................................................................................17
Air conditioning determination........................................................................................................24
Temperature and humidity design criteria......................................................................................28
Temperature and humidity recording instruments..........................................................................30
Relocation and temporary storage.................................................................................................31
Acclimation.....................................................................................................................................31
System air distribution....................................................................................................................32
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers.............................................................34
Planning for communications.........................................................................................................52
Server specifications.............................................................................................................................53
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstation specifications..................................53
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or
ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications.........................................................................59
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+ server specifications.............................................................................................64
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
server specifications...............................................................................................................69
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS server specifications............74
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ server
specifications..........................................................................................................................77
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications............................................................................82
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications....................116
Model 14T/00 rack.......................................................................................................................152
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack.......................................................................................................154
Hardware specification sheets............................................................................................................157
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers.............................................................158
Rack specifications......................................................................................................................162
Hardware management console specifications............................................................................200
Uninterruptible power supply........................................................................................................205
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack.....................................................206
Plan for power.....................................................................................................................................216
General power information...........................................................................................................216
Determining your power requirements.........................................................................................217
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type........................................................................227
Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units................................................255
Plan for cables....................................................................................................................................257
General cabling considerations....................................................................................................257
Measuring cables.........................................................................................................................258
Special considerations for model ESCALA PL 6450R cabling.....................................................258
Determining cable requirements and ordering cables..................................................................259
High speed link information..........................................................................................................261
Labeling cables............................................................................................................................264
Specifications for rack installation.......................................................................................................265
i
Planning
ii
Planning
Good planning is essential for the successful setup and use of your server. It ensures that you have
everything you need and that you have met all the prerequisites for your server. This will minimize errors
during install and allow for a quicker upgrade or install. The planning information in this topic helps you place
the server, plan power and environmental needs, and prepare for unique configurations based on how you will
use the server (for example, clustering of servers, Internet connections and rack mounting).
Planning scenarios that you are responsible for include:
• A new server installation
• A model upgrade
• Hardware modifications (feature additions, removals, conversions, or relocations)
• Software modifications (additions, removals, updates, or other changes)
To ensure that planning is completed successfully, you should assign a planning project manager who will
provide a documented plan that includes:
• A timeline for the activities to be performed
• Each major activity phase and the desired outcome
• A list of responsibilities and the person assigned
• A current system diagram and configuration listing, including all hardware content, software content,
cabling, and other pertinent configuration items (if this is a modification to an existing system)
• An end-system diagram showing hardware content and configuration details, including cabling
Note: Give special attention to disk units, clustering, and logical partitions (LPAR) system
configurations
• A key contacts list, including off-hours contact information for all key task or activities participants
• A plan for communicating appropriate elements of your plan with key personnel (for example, seller,
installer, management)
For information about how to print this topic, see Printable PDF.
Create a custom planning checklist
In this topic, you answer a comprehensive series of questions to customize your planning process. It is
extremely important to provide accurate answers. After you answer the questions, a customized checklist is
provided with only the planning tasks that you need to perform. It is important to communicate the details of
your hardware, software, and operational plan with those doing the hardware and software installation, as well
as those who enable the operational environment for your server. This will ensure that your hardware and
software are installed and configured correctly, according to your planning, and that your server is both set up
and enabled in a way that will support your anticipated usage and provide the solution you expect.
You need to have specific information about your new server order available to complete the interview. This
information includes model, release, features, whether it is an upgrade, and any additional solutions you have
ordered. If you need help answering the interview questions, contact your seller.
Solution planning
Before installing or upgrading your server, you need to verify that all your server equipment and code meets
or exceeds the operational requirements of your solution. See this topic to better understand those
requirements and to ensure that you accomplish all necessary planning tasks.
Planning reference
This topic provides reference information used throughout the planning topic:
• Physical site planning and preparation
• Server specifications
• Rack specifications
• Hardware specifications
• Power
Planning
1
Planning
• Cables
• Specifications for rack installation
Planning reference
This quick reference organizes your site planning information into categories. Within each category, you can
choose topics that consist of explanations and step-by-step procedures to give you the information you need
to prepare your site for your server.
Physical site planning and preparation
Provides physical site planning information to assist you in preparing your site for the arrival
of your server. This topic includes location considerations, power planning, and environmental
requirements, such as air quality, temperature, and humidity.
Server specifications
Provides detailed server information such as dimensions, electrical, power, temperature,
environment, and service clearances.
Hardware specification sheets
Provides detailed specification information for expansion units, migration expansion units,
racks, and Hardware Management Consoles (HMCs). This topic also includes links to
sources for removable media storage devices, display stations, printers, and communications
equipment, such as communication controllers, hubs, routers, and modems.
Power
Provides detailed information for planning power requirements for your server. This topic
includes power planning, power specifications, and detailed power cord, plug, and receptacle
information.
Cables
Provides detailed requirements for cables.
Printable PDF
Use this to view and print a PDF of this information.
To view or download the PDF version of detailed server and hardware specifications, general physical site
guidelines, or solution planning information, select one of the following:
• Planning (about 11095 KB).
• Physical site planning and preparation (about 3962 KB).
• Solution planning (about 1478 KB).
Saving PDF files
To save a PDF on your workstation for viewing or printing:
1. Right-click the PDF link in your browser.
2. Click the option that saves the PDF locally.
3. Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the PDF.
4. Click Save.
2
Planning reference
Planning
Downloading Adobe Reader
You need Adobe Reader installed on your system to view or print these PDFs. You can download a free copy
from the Adobe Web site (www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html).
Physical site planning and preparation
This topic provides you with the general information you need to prepare your site for the delivery and
installation of your server. This topic provides information regarding the following subjects:
Site selection, building and space considerations
• Site selection
• Access
• Static electricity and floor resistance
• Space requirements
• Floor construction and floor loading
• Raised floors
• Conductive contamination
• Computer room layout
Site environment, safety, and security
• Vibration and shock
• Lighting
• Acoustics
• Electromagnetic compatibility
• Computer room location
• Material and data storage protection
• Emergency planning for continuous operations
Electrical power and grounding
• General power information
• Power quality
• Voltage and frequency limits
• Power load
• Power source
• Dual power installations
Air conditioning
• Air conditioning determination
• General guidelines for data centers
• Temperature and humidity design criteria
• Temperature and humidity recording instruments
• Relocation and temporary storage
• Acclimation
• System air distribution
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
• Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
• Heat exchanger specifications
• Water specifications for the secondary cooling loop
• Water delivery specifications for secondary loops
• Layout and mechanical installation
• Suggested sources for secondary loop components
Saving PDF files
3
Planning
Communications
• Planning for communications
Site selection
The selection of a site for information technology equipment is the first consideration in planning and
preparing for the installation. Determine whether a new site is to be constructed or alterations are to be
performed on an existing site. This section provides specific information on building location, structure, and
space requirements for present and future needs.
Utilities
Power and communication facilities must be available in the quantities required for operation. If these are
inadequate, contact the utility company to determine if additional services can be made available.
Exposure to hazards
Pollution, flooding, radio or radar interference, and hazards caused by nearby industries can cause problems
to information technology equipment and recorded media. Any indication of exposure in these areas should
be recognized and included in the planning of the installation.
Access
A preliminary check of the building will show if adequate access for the normal delivery of supplies and
servers exists. A small alley, a narrow door opening, or limited access to the delivery area can become
inhibitive to installation. The loading dock, passageways, and elevators should be able to accommodate
heavy, oversized data processing support equipment such as air conditioning equipment.
Access route
Define an access route from the loading dock to the data processing area. A small alley (cannot
accommodate delivery truck), a narrow door opening <914 mm (<36 in.), low height 2032 mm(<80 in.), or
limited access to the delivery area can become inconvenient during the delivery process. If the heights of the
truck bed and the dock surface do not match, the ramp angle should be such that the machine frame does not
bottom out while taking it from the truck bed to the dock surface.
Within your site, ramps from hallways to computer-room floors should conform to the American Disabilities
Acts (ADA). The ADA requirement states that the ramp should have a 1:12 relationship. For each inch of
vertical height of the raised floor, one foot of ramp length should be provided. As an example, if the raised
floor height is 12 inches, then the ramp length should be 12 feet. The ramps should also be strong enough to
support the weight of the server while it is being moved over the surface. The hallways and doors should be
wide enough and high enough to allow passage of the server, and ensure adequate turning radius in the
hallway. The overhead clearance to pipes and ducts must be sufficient to allow movement of computer
equipment, air conditioners, and electrical equipment. Most standard passenger elevators are rated for 1134
kg (2500 lb.). Selected information technology equipment, and some site infrastructure equipment such as air
conditioning units might exceed 1134 kg (2500 lb.). Access to a freight elevator with a minimum rating of 1587
kg (3500 lb.) is recommended.
Review the access route from the loading dock to the computer room to prevent problems when moving the
frames. Consider making a cardboard template to check the access route for height, width, and length
interference. Employ qualified experts if special rigging is required to get the server from the loading dock to
the computer room.
Because the dynamic loads of rolling frames are higher than the static loads of stationary frames, floor
protection is required at delivery time. It is also important to consider the caster point loads. Some floors
cannot withstand the force exerted by the casters of heavier systems. For example, caster point loads on
some servers can be as high as 455 kg (1,000 lb.). This can penetrate, or otherwise damage, the surface of
some floors.
4
Physical site planning and preparation
Planning
It is also important to protect the raised floor from damage when moving servers or relocating processors in
the computer room. Ten mm (3/8 in.) plywood sheeting provides adequate protection. For some of the heavier
high-end servers, it is recommended that you use tempered masonite or plyron. Plywood might be too soft for
the heavier servers.
Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment
DANGERHeavy equipment
mishandled. (D006)
personal injury or equipment damage might result if
You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning information
provided, with assistance from an authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery,
prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the
equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the
time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the
transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The
authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as
needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers
when you relocate or dispose of equipment.
Static electricity and floor resistance
Floor covering material can contribute to buildup of high static electrical charges as a result of the motion of
people, carts, and furniture in contact with the floor material. Abrupt discharge of the static charges causes
discomfort to personnel and might cause malfunction of electronic equipment.
Static buildup and discharge can be minimized by:
• Maintaining the relative humidity of the room within the server operating limits. Choose a control point
that normally keeps the humidity between 35 percent and 60 percent. See the Air conditioning
determination for further guidance.
• Providing a conductive path to ground from a metallic raised floor structure including the metal panels.
• Grounding the raised floor metallic support structure (stringer, pedestals) to building steel at several
places within the room. The number of ground points is based on the size of the room. The larger the
room, the more ground points are required.
• Ensuring the maximum resistance for the flooring system is 2 x 1010 ohms, measured between the
floor surface and the building (or an applicable ground reference). Flooring material with a lower
resistance will further decrease static buildup and discharge. For safety, the floor covering and
flooring system should provide a resistance of no less than 150 kilohms when measured between any
two points on the floor space 1 m (3 ft.) apart.
• Maintenance of antistatic floor coverings (carpet and tile) should be in agreement with the individual
supplier's recommendations. Carpeted floor coverings must meet electrical conductivity requirements.
Use only antistatic materials with low-propensity ratings.
• Using ESD-resistant furniture with conductive casters to prevent static buildup.
Measuring floor resistance
The following equipment is required for measuring floor resistance:
• A test instrument similar to an AEMC-1000 megohmmeter is required for measuring floor conductivity.
The following figure shows the typical test connection to measure floor conductivity.
Access
5
Planning
Figure 1. Typical test connection to measure floor conductivity
Space requirements
The floor area required for the equipment is determined by the specific servers to be installed, the location of
columns, floor loading capacity, and provisions for future expansion. See Floor construction and floor loading
to review floor loading and weight distribution for your system. When the amount of space is determined, allow
for the addition of furniture, carts, and storage cabinets. Additional space, not necessarily in the computer
area, is required for air conditioning, electrical, security systems, and fire protection equipment as well as for
the storage of tapes, forms, and other supplies. Additional space might be needed to access the server (for
example, rack-door-opening clearance). Plan to store all combustible materials in properly designed and
protected storage areas.
A computer room or area should be separated from adjacent areas to allow for air conditioning, fire protection,
and security. The floor-to-ceiling height must be sufficient to allow server top covers to open for service and
should be adequate to allow air circulation from the data processing machine. Recommended heights are 2.6
m to 2.9 m (8 ft. 6 in. to 9 ft. 6 in.) from the building floor or (if used) from the raised floor to ceiling, but higher
ceilings are acceptable. In new construction or remodeling, the computer room area should have a minimum
door width of 914 mm (36 in.). Because many machine frames are close to 914 mm (36 in.) in width, the use
of a 1067 mm (42 in.) door width would be preferable. The door height should be a minimum of 2032 mm (80
in.) of unobstructed height (no threshold plate).
Floor construction and floor loading
A floor loading assessment is the evaluation of the concrete subfloor, not the raised floor. The weight of the
raised floor is considered in the floor loading formula.
The building floor must support the weight of the equipment to be installed. Although older devices might
impose 345 kg/m2 (75 lb./ft.2) on the building floor, a typical server design imposes a load of no more than 340
kg/m2 (70 lb./ft.2). The following pounds-per-square-foot (lb./ft.2) formula is used to calculate floor loading. For
assistance with floor load evaluation, contact a structural engineer.
Machine weight + 15 lb./ft.2 X (1/2 of the service clearance) + (10 lb./ft.2 X total area)
Total Area
• The floor loading should not exceed 240 kg/m2 (50 lb./ft.2) with a partition allowance of 100 kg/m2 (20
lb./ft.2) for a total floor load rating of 340 kg/m2 (70 lb./ft.2).
• The raised-floor weight plus the cable weight adds 50 kg/m2 (10 lb./ft.2) uniformly across the total area
used in calculations and is included in the 340 kg/m2 (70 lb./ft.2) floor loading. (The total area is
defined as: machine area + 0.5 service clearance.)
• When the service clearance area is also used to distribute machine weight (weight distribution/service
clearance), 75 kg/m2 (15 lb./ft.2) is considered for personnel and equipment traffic. The distribution
weight is applied over 0.5 of the clearance up to a maximum of 760 mm (30 in.) as measured from the
machine frame.
Raised floors
A raised floor accomplishes the following major objectives:
6
Static electricity and floor resistance
Planning
• Improves operational efficiency and allows greater flexibility in the arrangement of equipment
• Permits the space between the two floors to be used to supply cooling air to the equipment or area
• Allows for future layout change with minimum reconstruction cost
• Protects the interconnecting cables and power receptacles
• Prevents tripping hazards
A raised floor should be constructed of fire-resistant or noncombustible material. The two general floor types
are shown in the following figure. The first figure is of a stringerless floor, and the second figure is a floor with
stringers.
Figure 1. Raised floors types
Raised floor factors:
• No metal or highly-conductive material that might be at ground potential should be exposed to the
walking surface when a metallic raised-floor structure is used. Such exposure is considered an
electrical safety hazard.
• The raised-floor height should be between 155 mm (6 in.) and 750 mm (30 in.). For processors with
multiple channels, a minimum raised-floor height of 305 mm (12 in.) is recommended. Clearance must
be adequate to accommodate interconnecting cables, fiber cable raceways, power distribution, and
any piping that is present under the floor. Experience has shown that higher raised-floor heights allow
better air-conditioning balance in the room.
• Caster point loads on some servers can be as high as 455 kg (1,000 lb.) concentrated load anywhere
on the panel with a 2 mm (0.080 in.) maximum deflection .
• When a raised-floor panel is cut for cable entry or air supply, an additional panel support (pedestal)
might be required to restore the structural integrity of the panel to the above requirement.
• Use protective covering (such as plywood, tempered masonite, or plyron panels) to prevent damage
to floor tiles, carpeting, and panels while equipment is being moved into or is relocated within the
installation. When the equipment is moved, the dynamic load on the casters is significantly greater
than when the equipment is stationary.
• Concrete subfloors require treatment to prevent the release of dust.
• Use noncombustible protective molding to eliminate sharp edges on all floor cutouts to prevent
damage to cables and hoses and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutout.
• Pedestals must be firmly attached to the structural (concrete) floor using an adhesive.
• Cable cutout size information is determined by the volume of cables passing through the cutout. See
the server's documentation for recommendations on the cable cutout size.
Signal reference ground
To minimize the effects of high-frequency (HF) interference and other undesired electrical signals (commonly
referred to as electrical noise), a Signal Reference System (SRS) may be recommended. An SRS may be
made up of a Signal Reference Ground or Grid (SRG), or a Signal Reference Plane (SRP). A Signal
Reference Ground or Grid may also be known as a Zero Signal Reference Ground (ZSRG). Regardless of the
name used, the intent is to provide an equal potential point of reference for equipment installed in a
contiguous area for a wide range of frequencies. This is accomplished by installing a network of low
impedance conductors throughout the information technology room.
Access (raised) flooring systems that utilize bolted stringer construction can be used to provide a simple SRG.
Floor systems that have either no stringer or snap-in stringers do not provide for an effective SRG, and other
methods for installing a SRG should be used.
Raised floors
7
Planning
For safety requirements, the SRG must be connected to earth ground. SRG practices recommend that all
metallic objects that cross the SRG area are to be bonded (mechanically connected) to the SRG.
For more information on Signal Reference Grounds, contact your Installation Planning Representative.
Figure 2. Signal reference ground
Conductive contamination
Semiconductors and sensitive electronics used in current information technology equipment have allowed for
the manufacture of very high density electronic circuitry. Although new technology allows for significant
increases or capacity in a smaller physical space, it is susceptible to contamination, especially contamination
particles that will conduct electricity. Since the early 1990s, it has been determined that data center
environments may contain sources of conductive contamination. Contaminants include: carbon fibers, metallic
debris such as aluminum, copper and steel filings from construction, and zinc whiskers from zinc-electroplated
materials used in raised floor structures.
Although very small, and at times not easily seen without the visual aid of magnifying lenses, this type of
contamination can have disastrous impact on equipment availability and reliability. Errors, component damage
and equipment outages caused by conductive contamination can be difficult to diagnose. Failures may be at
first attributed to other more common factors such as lightning events or electrical power quality or even just
presumed to be defective parts.
Zinc whiskers
The most common conductive contamination in raised-floor data centers is what is known as zinc whiskers. It
is the most common because it is frequently found on the underside of certain types of access floor tiles.
Typically, the wood core style floor tile has a flat steel bottom. The steel may be coated with zinc either by a
hot-dip-galvanize process or by zinc electroplate. The zinc electroplate steel exhibits a phenomena that
appears as whisker-like growths on the surface. These small particles of approximately 1-2 mm (.04-.08 in.) in
length can break away from the surface and get pulled into the cooling air stream. Eventually they might be
ingested by the equipment air, settle on a circuit board and create a problem. If you suspect that you may
have this type of problem, contact your seller.
The following figure shows light reflection from zinc whiskers.
Figure 1. Light reflection from zinc whiskers
8
Raised floors
Planning
Computer room layout
When planning your computer room, several important factors must be taken into consideration.
Service clearance and floor loading
Each piece of equipment that you plan to install has some minimum amount of space around it that is required
to be kept clear so that service might be performed on that equipment, if it become necessary. Beyond
keeping a clear area around the equipment, it is advisable that traffic patterns for work flow do not fall in
service clearance boundaries. Do not allow the service clearance areas to be used for temporary or
permanent storage. Exact clearance dimensions are supplied with the individual product specifications.
Generally, floor loading areas fall inside the service clearance boundaries. Consult individual product planning
documentation and your seller for specific information about the equipment that you are planning to install. If
you have not yet done so, review floor loading, weight distribution, service clearance, and machine area.
Physical and logical priority
Some types of peripheral equipment might require physical or logical positioning in relation to the processor or
other equipment that might dictate where that equipment must be placed on your floor. Consult individual
product planning documentation and your seller to determine if equipment that you are planning to install must
be specifically placed. Such equipment should be situated in your floor layout diagrams first, before other
equipment that does not require precise positioning.
Restrictive cable lengths
As computing power increases, cable lengths might decrease to support improvements in processing speed.
Consult product-specific planning documentation and your seller to determine where cable lengths will allow
you to place each piece of equipment on your floor. Review cabling and connectivity, especially if you are
using Integrated Cluster Bus (ICB) cables.
Practical work space and safety
Allow enough room around equipment for normal movement of work flow. Consider the placement of
equipment in relation to entrances and exits, windows, columns, wall-mounted equipment, such as circuit
breaker boxes and electrical outlets, safety equipment, fire extinguishers, storage areas, and furniture. Be
especially careful to allow easy access to things like the emergency power-off controls, smoke detectors,
sprinkler systems, and under-floor or in-ceiling fire extinguishing systems.
If possible, make plans now to allow for future additional equipment. Plan cable routing and server locations to
make it easy for additional units to be added.
Other equipment
In addition to the information technology equipment that you will be installing, allow room for office furniture
and equipment, power and air conditioning, storage for operating supplies, and miscellaneous considerations,
such as a meeting area, vending machine location, or water fountains.
It is highly recommended that scale drawings of your proposed layout be prepared and reviewed by both your
seller and all service providers to ensure that your floor layout is physically capable and practically useful.
Following is a chart of standard symbols used to create floor layouts.
Figure 1. Standard symbols to create floor layouts
Computer room layout
9
Planning
Figure 2. Sample plan view
Vibration and shock
It might be necessary to install the information technology equipment in an area subject to minor vibrations.
The following information supplies vibration and shock limits for your equipment and some basic definitions
concerning vibration. The vibration levels normally present in computer-room and industrial installations are
well within the indicated levels.
However, mounting the equipment in racks, stackers, or similar equipment might increase the risks of
vibration-related problems. It is important to consult the manufacturer of such equipment to ensure that
vibration factors will not exceed the specifications provided in the following tables.
Some useful definitions of vibration include:
Acceleration: Normally measured in g multiples of the acceleration because of the force of gravity. If the
frequency is also known for a sine wave, acceleration can be calculated from displacement. (g: The unit of
acceleration caused by the force of gravity.)
Continuous: Vibrations present over an extended period and cause a sustained resonant response in the
equipment.
Displacement: Magnitude of the wave shape; normally given in peak-to-peak displacement in English or
metric units:
• Normally used to measure floor vibrations at low frequencies
• If the frequency is also known, it can be converted to displacement g for a sine wave.
10
Vibration and shock
Planning
Note: Many measuring instruments can convert displacement to g for either sinusoidal or complex wave
shapes.
Peak: The maximum value of a sinusoidal or random vibration. This can be expressed as peak-to-peak in
cases of sinusoidal vibration displacement.
Random: A complex vibration wave form varying in amplitude and frequency content.
rms (root mean square): The long-term average of the acceleration or amplitude values. Normally used as a
measure of overall vibration for random vibration.
Shock: Intermittent inputs that occur and then decay to zero prior to a recurrence of the event. Typical
examples are foot traffic, fork lifts in aisles, and external events such as railroad, highway traffic, or
construction activities (including blasting).
Sinusoidal: Vibrations with the characteristic shape of the classical sine wave (for example, 60-Hz ac power).
Transient: Vibrations that are intermittent and do not cause a sustained resonant response in the equipment.
If you need to make any calculations or require information regarding the above definitions, consult a
mechanical engineer, a vibration consulting engineer, or your seller.
The three classes of a vibration environment are shown in the following table.
Table 1. Vibration environment
Class Vibration environment
V1
Floor-mounted machines in an office environment
V2
Table-top and wall-mounted machines
V3
Heavy industrial and mobile equipment
A summary of the vibration limits for each of the three classes is shown in the following table. A legend follows
the table.
Note: Vibration levels at any discrete frequency should not exceed a level of 1/2 the g rms values for the class
listed in the Vibration environment table.
Table 2. Operational vibration and shock limits
Class g rms g peak Mils Shock
V1 L 0.10
0.30
3.4 3 g at 3 ms
V1 H 0.05
0.15
1.7 3 g at 3 ms
V2
0.10
0.30
3.4 3 g at 3 ms
V3
0.27
0.80
9.4 application dependent
L: Light, weight less than 600 kg.
H: Heavy, weight equal to or greater than 600 kg.
g rms: Overall average g level over the 5 to 500 Hz frequency range.
g peak: Maximum real-time instantaneous peak value of the vibration time history wave form (excluding
events defined as shocks).
Mils: Peak-to-peak displacement of a discrete frequency in the 5 to 17 Hz range. One mil equal .001 inch.
Vibration and shock
11
Planning
Shock: Amplitude and pulse width of a classical 1/2 sine shock pulse.
The values given in the Operational vibration and shock limit table are based on worst-case field data
measured at customer installations for current and previously released products. The vibration and shock
environment will not exceed these values except for abnormal cases involving earthquakes or direct impacts.
Earthquakes
Special frame-strengthening features or RPQs might be required in earthquake prone areas. Local codes
might require the information technology equipment to be tied down to the concrete floor. If sufficient
information on equipment tie down is not provided in the product's physical planning documentation, consult
with your seller.
Lighting
Light sources in the equipment room and work station areas should have a general lighting level of 300 to 500
lumens/m2 (lux) or 30 to 50 foot-candles. Proper lighting is required to normally operate the server and when
service is required. When preparing the equipment room and work areas, consider painting the room a light
color with a white ceiling to reflect (rather than absorb) light. To lessen any glare, windows should not be in an
operator's field of vision or directly facing the display screen. Direct sunlight can cause light-sensing devices
to malfunction and make observations of various signal lamps difficult.
To avoid eye fatigue, light sources should be compatible. Universal white fluorescent lamps are compatible
with both incandescent lamps and daylight.
The following figure shows a suggested lighting layout for a workstation.
Figure 1. Typical lighting for a workstation
Provide and maintain emergency lighting, of sufficient intensity, to ensure a safe exit.
Acoustics
Acoustical noise emission data on products is provided for the benefit of installation planners and consultants
to help predict acoustical noise levels in data centers and other installations of information technology and
telecommunications equipment. Such noise declarations also allow you to compare noise levels of one
product to another and to compare the levels to any applicable specifications. The format of the data provided
conforms to ISO 9296: Acoustics - Declared Noise Emission Values of Computer and Business Equipment.
The measurement procedures used to acquire the data conform to International Standard ISO 7779 and its
American National Standard equivalent ANSI S12.10. The following terms are used to present acoustical
data.
• LWAd is the declared (upper limit) A-weighted sound power level for a random sample of machines.
• LpAm is the mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure levels either at the operator position or at
the bystander (1-meter) positions for a random sample of machines.
• <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound-pressure-emission levels at the one-meter
positions for a random sample of machines.
Acoustical treatment of data centers or other rooms, in which the equipment is installed, is recommended to
achieve lower noise levels. Lower noise levels tend to enhance employee productivity and avoid mental
12
Lighting
Planning
fatigue, improve communications, reduce employee complaints, and generally improve employee comfort.
Proper room design, including the use of acoustical treatment, might require the services of a specialist in
acoustics.
The total noise level of an installation with information technology and telecommunications equipment is an
accumulation of all the noise sources in the room. This level is affected by the physical arrangement of the
products on the floor, the sound reflective (or absorptive) characteristics of the room surfaces, and the noise
from other data center support equipment such as air conditioning units and backup power equipment. Noise
levels might be reduced with proper spacing and orientation of the various noise-emitting equipment. Provide
sufficient space around such machines: the farther apart they can be placed, the lower the overall room noise
will be.
In smaller installations, such as small offices and general business areas, pay additional attention to the
location of equipment relative to the work areas of the employees. At work areas, consider locating personal
computers and computer workstations next to the desk rather than on top of it. Small servers should be
located as far away from personnel as possible. Locate nearby work areas away from the exhaust of
computer equipment.
The use of absorptive materials can reduce the overall noise level in most installations. Effective and
economical sound reduction can be achieved by using a sound-absorptive ceiling. The use of acoustically
absorbing free-standing barriers can reduce the direct noise, increase room absorption and provide privacy.
The use of absorptive material, such as carpeting on the floor, results in further reduction of the sound level in
the room. Any carpeting used in a computer room must meet the electrical continuity requirements stated in
Static electricity and floor resistance. To prevent computer room noise from reaching adjacent office areas,
walls should be constructed from the structural floor to the structural ceiling. Also, ensure that doors and walls
are properly sealed. Acoustical treatment of overhead ducts might further reduce noise transmitted to or from
other rooms.
Many large systems products are offered with optional acoustical front and rear doors to help attenuate the
noise of the product itself. Smaller products might also offer special acoustical packages. If noise exposure is
a concern for the installation planners or employees, inquiries should be made to the seller on the availability
of such product options.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Information technology equipment installation might occasionally be planned in an area that has a high
electromagnetic-radiated field environment. This condition results when the information technology equipment
is near a radio frequency source such as a radio-transmitting antenna (AM, FM, TV, or two-way radio), civilian
and military radar, and certain industrial machines (rf induction heaters, rf arc welders, and insulation testers).
If any of these sources are near the proposed site, a planning review might be appropriate to assess the
environment and determine whether any special installation or product considerations are advisable to reduce
interference. Consult your seller. Workstations located near devices like transformers or buried electrical
conduits can experience jitter on the workstation display in the presence of strong magnetic fields.
Most products can tolerate low-frequency to very-high-frequency rf levels of 3 volts per meter. Field strengths
greater than 3 volts per meter might cause operational or serviceability problems. Products have different
tolerance levels to electromagnetic-radiated fields in different frequency ranges. Radar (frequency of 1300
MHz, and 2800 MHz) signals with field strengths of a maximum of 5 volts per meter are acceptable. If
problems occur, reorientation of the server or selective shielding might be required.
Two-way radio or cellular telephone usage should be properly controlled in the computer room. To reduce the
likelihood of a problem, the following recommendations should be considered when operating such
equipment:
• Keep hand-held transmitters (for example, walkie-talkies, radio paging, and cellular telephones) a
minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft.) from information technology equipment.
• Use only an operator-controlled transmitting device (no automatic transmissions). Develop specific
rules, such as - Do not transmit within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of a fully covered operating server. If covers are
open, do not transmit.
• Choose the minimum output power that will accomplish your communication needs.
Extremely low frequency (ELF) fields
Acoustics
13
Planning
With the exception of some video display cathode ray tubes (CRT), most information technology equipment is
tolerant of extremely low frequency (ELF) electromagnetic fields. The video displays that use cathode ray
tubes are more sensitive because they use electromagnetic fields to position the electron beam in normal
operation. The extremely low frequency range covers frequencies between 0 and 300 Hz. It is also referred to
as electrical power frequency because most world electrical power is generated at either 50 or 60 Hz.
Many products tolerate ELF electromagnetic fields in the following ranges:
• Cathode ray tube video display: 15-20 milligauss
• Liquid crystal display (LCD) : 10 Gauss
• Magnetic tape equipment: 20 Gauss
• Disk drive equipment : 20 Gauss
• Processors or Servers : 20 Gauss
Typical information technology centers exhibit an ambient electromagnetic field between 3-8 milligauss. Some
equipment within a center may, under normal operation, produce fields in excess of 100 milligauss. Examples
of equipment that produces large magnetic fields include: power distribution units, electric motors, electrical
transformers, laser printers and uninterruptible power systems. However, magnetic field density decreases
rapidly with distance. If a CRT display is located near equipment that produces large electromagnetic fields,
the display may exhibit distortion such as poor focus, change in image shape or slight motion in static display
images. Moving the CRT away from the equipment may remedy the problem.
Computer room location
Before selecting a location for the computer, give attention to these requirements:
• The computer room should be in a noncombustible or fire-resistant building or room.
• The computer room should not be above, below, or adjacent to areas where hazardous materials or
gases are stored, manufactured, or processed. If the computer must be located near such an area,
take extra precautions to safeguard the area.
• If the computer room is below ground level, provide adequate drainage.
Safety consideration and fire prevention
Safety is a vital factor when planning computer installation. This consideration is reflected in the choice of the
computer location, building materials used, fire prevention equipment, air conditioning and electrical systems,
and personnel training.
If an inconsistency occurs between your server's recommendations and any local or national regulation, the
more stringent of the recommendations or regulations should take precedence. The National Fire Protection
Association standard, NFPA 75, provides guidelines for protection of information technology equipment. The
customer is responsible for adherence to governmental regulations.
• Computer room walls should have a minimum of a 1-hour-fire-resistance rating and extend from the
structural floor to the structural ceiling (slab-to-slab).
• In rooms used for critical operations, it is preferable to install processors in 1-hour-fire-rated rooms
separate from the main computer room.
• If the computer room has one or more outside walls adjacent to a building that is susceptible to fire,
consider taking the following precautionary actions:
♦ Installing shatterproof windows in the computer room to improve the safety of personnel and
equipment from flying debris and water damage. Usually, windows in the computer room are
undesirable because of security concerns, and the negative effect they have on temperature
control. They can cause excessive heating in the summer, and excessive cooling in the
winter.
♦ Installing sprinklers outside the windows to protect them with a blanket of water if a fire occurs
in the adjacent area.
♦ Sealing the windows with masonry.
• Where a false (or hung) ceiling or insulating material is to be added, ensure that it is noncombustible
or fire-resistant material. All duct work should be noncombustible. If combustible material is used in
the space between the structural ceiling and the false ceiling, appropriate protection should be
provided.
• A raised floor that is installed over the structural floor should be constructed of noncombustible or
fire-retardant materials. If the structural floor is of combustible material, it should be protected by
water sprinklers on the ceiling of the room below.
14
Electromagnetic compatibility
Planning
Note: Before the information technology equipment is installed, the space between the raised and the
structural floors should be cleared of debris. This space should also be checked periodically after installation
to keep it free of accumulated dust, possible debris, and unused cables.
• The roof, ceiling, and floor above the computer room and the storage area for recorded media should
be watertight. Liquid piping, roof drains, and other potential sources of liquid damage should be
rerouted around the area.
• The space under the raised floor in the computer room should be provided with drainage to protect
against flooding or trapped water.
• Waste material containers should be constructed of metal with a frame-suppressant lid.
Fire prevention equipment in a computer room
Fire prevention equipment in the computer room should be installed as an added safety measure. A fire
suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. Your insurance underwriter, local fire marshall, and
local building inspector are all parties that should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that
provides the correct level of coverage and protection. The seller designs and manufactures equipment to
internal and external standards that require certain environments for reliable operation. Because the seller
does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire suppression systems, the seller does not make
compatibility claims of any kind nor does the seller provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.
• An early-warning fire detection system should be installed to protect the computer room and storage
areas for recorded media. This system should activate both an audible and a visual alarm in the
rooms and at a monitored central station.
• Portable carbon dioxide fire extinguishers, of suitable size and number, should be provided in the
computer room for use on electrical equipment.
• Portable, pressurized-water extinguishers should be provided for combustible material such as paper.
• Extinguishers should be readily accessible to individuals in the area, and extinguisher locations
should be marked so they are visible.
• Automatic sprinkler systems and gaseous total flooding systems are acceptable forms of fixed
protection. For information on environmentally friendly gases for total flooding systems, consult NFPA
2001 titled Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
• Special consideration should be used if you prefer a gaseous total flooding system. If a gaseous total
flooding system is installed, include a time delay feature that allows investigation and evacuation from
the covered area of the gaseous total flooding system. A cross-zoned detection system is suggested.
• The protected area must be evacuated whenever the gaseous total flooding system or its controls are
being serviced. Additionally, a master Disarm switch, available for use by the system service
personnel, is required. With the switch set in the off position, the detonators used to release the
gaseous total flooding system must be made inoperative, even if the circuit fails elsewhere in the
system. This switch must be placed in the off (manual) position before servicing begins to prevent
possible accidental discharge of the gaseous total flooding system.
• Alternatives to ordinary wet pipe sprinkler systems might include dry pipe systems or preaction
systems. Water flows into preaction systems only if triggered by smoke or heat detectors. The
detection systems should be independent of gaseous total flooding system detection systems. The
On-Off type of sprinkler head is not recommended because it is more prone to leakage.
To determine the proper fire protection required for the computer room, consult with your insurance
underwriter and your local code authority.
Material and data storage protection
Special safety considerations are required when storing data or other material. Consider the following factors:
• Any data or material stored in the computer room, whether in the form of magnetic tapes, paper
tapes, cards, or paper forms, should be limited to the minimum needed for safe, efficient operation
and should be enclosed in metal cabinets or fire-resistant containers when not in use.
• For security purposes, and protection against fire, a separate room for material storage is strongly
recommended. This room should be constructed of fire-resistant material (minimum
2-hour-fire-resistance rating). An approved fixed extinguishing system is recommended. Fixed
extinguishing systems include automatic sprinklers and approved total flooding gaseous systems.
If continuity of operation is critical, plan a remote storage location for vital records if a disaster occurs. Key
considerations in the choice of an off-site location for data storage are that the area is:
Computer room location
15
Planning
• Not subject to the same risk that might occur in the computer room.
• Suitable for long-term storage of hardcopy records and magnetic media files.
Air conditioning systems
In most installations, the computer area is controlled by a separate air conditioning system. Therefore,
emergency power-off switches for the equipment and air conditioning should be placed in convenient
locations, preferably near the console operator and next to the main exit doors. See National Fire Protection
Association standard, NFPA 70 article 645, for information.
• When the regular building air conditioning system is used, with supplemental units in the computer
area, the supplemental units would then be handled as stated above. The regular building air
conditioning system should have an audible alarm to alert maintenance personnel of an emergency.
• Fire dampers should be located in all air ducts at fire walls.
• The air filters in the air conditioning system should contain noncombustible or self-extinguishing
material.
Electrical systems
Provide a mainline disconnect control for the computer equipment at a remote location. The remote controls
should be in a convenient location, preferably near the console operator and next to the main exit doors. They
should be next to the power-off switch for the air conditioning system and should be properly marked. A light
should be installed to indicate when power is on. The National Electric Code (NFPA 70) article 645 states that
a single disconnecting means to control both the electronic equipment and the HVAC system is permitted.
• If continuity of operation is essential, a standby power source should be installed.
• It is advisable to install an automatic battery-operated lighting unit to illuminate an area if a power or
lighting circuit failure occurs. This unit is wired to and controlled by the lighting circuit.
• Watertight connectors are recommended under raised floors because of the moisture exposures
(water pipe leaks, high humidity levels) under raised floors.
Emergency planning for continuous operations
If a power outage occurs, continued operation depends on information stored on cards, tapes, or disks, and
the equipment used to process the information being available immediately. Arrangements should be made
for emergency use of other equipment and transportation of personnel, data, and supplies to a temporary
location. Arrangements should also be made to ensure the continuous operation of environment equipment,
such as air conditioning. Duplicate or master records and programming data should be maintained in a remote
area, from which the necessary information can be taken to resume operation.
Precautions and personnel training
Further plans should include training of personnel to act in an emergency situation.
• Sound alarm signals for fire detection and for other abnormal conditions to familiarize personnel with
the alarm.
• Monitor the computer room, air conditioning equipment room, and electrical and data storage room at
all times.
• Inspect steam pipes and water pipes above the false ceiling to guard against possible damage due to
accidental breakage, leakage, or condensation.
• Locate emergency exit doors in the computer area. The number of doors depends on the size and
location of the area. Train personnel in emergency measures such as:
♦ Shutting off all electrical power
♦ Shutting off the air conditioning system
♦ Shutting off the chilled water to the information technology equipment
♦ Calling the fire company
♦ Handling fire extinguishers in the approved manner
♦ Operating a small-diameter fire hose
♦ Evacuating records
♦ Evacuating personnel
♦ Administering first aid
Lightning protection for communication wiring
16
Material and data storage protection
Planning
Be sure to install lightning protection devices to protect communication wiring and equipment from surges and
transients induced into the communication wiring. In any area subject to lightning, surge suppressors should
be installed at each end of every outdoor cable installation, whether installed above the ground (aerial) or
buried below the ground.
Information about lightning surge suppressors for communication wiring and recommended methods for
outdoor communication cables can be found in the information technology product's physical planning
documentation.
General power information
Information Technology equipment requires a reliable electrical power source that is free from interference or
disturbance. Electrical power companies generally supply power of sufficient quality. The Power
quality,Voltage and frequency limits, Power load, and Power source topics provide the guidance and
specifications needed to meet the requirements of the equipment. Qualified personnel must ensure that
electrical power distribution system is safe and meets local and national codes. They must also ensure that
the voltage measured at the power receptacle is within the specified tolerance for the equipment. In addition,
a separate power feeder is required for items such as lighting and air conditioning. A properly installed
electrical power system will help to provide for reliable operation of your equipment.
Other factors to consider when planning and installing the electrical system include a means of providing a
low impedance conducting path to ground (path to earth) and lightning protection. Depending on the
geographical location, special considerations may be required for lightning protection. Your electrical
contractor should meet all local and national electrical code requirements. Building electrical power is normally
derived from a three-phase power distribution system. General office areas are normally provided with
single-phase power outlets, and data processing rooms are provided with three-phase power.
Some IT equipment and devices may require standard three-phase power; others may require single-phase
power. The power requirements for each device are specified in the individual server specifications for that
server. Nominal voltage, plugs, receptacles, and in some cases, conduit and back boxes are listed in the
specific server specifications. Refer to the respective server specifications to determine the power
requirements. Ensure that existing branch circuit outlets are the correct type and are properly grounded (see
Grounding).
Power quality
The quality of electrical power can make a big difference in the performance of any sensitive electronic
equipment. Most equipment is very robust and can tolerate some power disturbances or transients. However,
large disturbances can cause equipment power failures or errors. Transients can come into the site on the
power utility company lines but are often caused by electrical equipment installed in the building. For example,
transients can be produced by welders, cranes, motors, induction heaters, elevators, copy machines, and
other office equipment. The best way to prevent problems caused by power disturbances is to have
transient-producing equipment on a separate power service than the one that supplies power to your
information technology equipment.
Ground or earth
When used in reference to electrical power systems, Ground is a conducting connection between an electrical
circuit and the earth or some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. The term ground is the most
common name used, however it is also referred to as earth or terra in several international geographies. In
this topic, these terms and other local language equivalents are interchangeable.
Ground is a critical component of an electrical power distribution system. A properly installed ground system
allows for safe operation of equipment that is connected to the electrical power source under normal and
electrical or equipment fault conditions. The life safety function of ground and grounding methods is
addressed by the appropriate local and national electrical wiring codes. In the United States, this code is
known as the National Electric Code or publication 70 of the National Fire Protection Association. Many
countries have adopted the National Electric Code or have developed an equivalent code.
The National Electric Code and its equivalents have a primary objective to provide safe operation of electrical
power distribution systems and electrical equipment installations. Compliance with these codes does not
Emergency planning for continuous operations
17
Planning
guarantee efficient operation of equipment connected to the power distribution systems. When sensitive
electronic equipment is connected, there are often times when additional ground connections may be
required. Typically, additional ground connections are recommended when there is a concern for high
frequency or radio frequency (RF) interference, which may impact electronic circuits. These additional ground
requirements will be found with the installation documentation for specific equipment. Additional ground
requirements may also be recommendations from engineering or data center evaluations, reviews or surveys.
Local or national codes allow for these additional grounds to be installed.
Grounding
Most equipment, unless double insulated, has power cords containing an insulated grounding conductor
(color-coded green or green with yellow stripe) that connects the frame of the equipment to the ground
terminal at the power receptacle. The power receptacles for equipment are identified in the equipment
documentation and should match the equipment power plug. In some cases, there may be options for
different manufacturer equivalent receptacles. The equipment plugs should not be changed or altered to
match existing connectors or receptacles. To do so may create a safety hazard and void product warranty.
The connectors or receptacles for the equipment should be installed to a branch circuit with an equipment
grounding conductor, connected to the grounding bus bar in the branch-circuit distribution panel. The
grounding bus bar in the panel should then be connected back to the service entrance or suitable building
ground by an equipment grounding conductor.
Information technology equipment must be properly grounded. It is recommended that an insulated green wire
ground, the same size as the phase wire, be installed between the branch circuit panel and the receptacle.
For personnel safety, the ground must have sufficiently low impedance to limit the voltage to ground and to
facilitate the operation of protective devices in the circuit. For example, the ground path shall not exceed 1
ohm for 120-volt, 20-ampere branch circuit devices.
The ground path impedance limit is 0.5 ohms for 120 volt branch circuits protected by 30 ampere circuit
breakers. The limit is 0.1 ohms for 120 volt 60 to 100 ampere circuits.
All grounds entering the room should be interconnected somewhere within the building to provide a common
ground potential. This includes any separate power sources, lighting and convenience outlets, and other
grounded objects, such as building steel, plumbing, and duct work.
The equipment grounding conductor must be electrically attached to both the enclosure of the computer
power center and the connector grounding terminal. Conduit must not be used as the only grounding means,
and it must be connected in parallel with any grounding conductors it contains.
Figure 1. Transient grounding plate
Transient grounding
To minimize the effects of high-frequency electrical noise, the branch circuit power panel servicing the
equipment should be mounted in contact with bare building steel or connected to it by a short length of cable.
If this is not possible, a metal area of at least 1 m2 (10 ft.2) in contact with masonry can be used. The plate
should be connected to the green-conductor common.
18
General power information
Planning
Figure 2. Transient grounding plate
The preferred connection is with a braided strap. If a braided strap is not available, the connection should
consist of no. 12 AWG (3.3 mm or 0.0051 in.) or larger conductor and should not be more than 1.5 m (5 ft.)
long. To minimize this length, the preferred connection of this braided strap or conductor is to the nearest
portion of the enclosure on the panel, if the enclosure is electrically continuous from the green-conductor
common point to this point of connection.
The raised-floor-supporting substructure can be used as a substitute for the transient plate if the structure has
a consistently low-impedance path. If the raised floor has stringers or other subframing that makes electrical
connection between the pedestals, the floor itself can be used for the signal reference plane. Some raised
floors are stringerless and the floor tiles lock into isolated pedestals by gravity alone. If there is no reliable
electrical connection between the pedestals, a signal reference grid (see figure) can be constructed by
connecting the pedestals together with conductors. A minimal grid would interconnect every other pedestal in
the immediate area of the power panel and extend at least 3 m (10 ft.) in all directions.
Figure 3. Transient grounding using the raised floor support structure
Figure 4. Signal reference grid
Stranded bare or insulated conductor of at least no. 8 AWG (8 mm or 0.0124 in.) copper is required. This
conductor provides a low-impedance path and is strong enough to make physical damage unlikely. Any
connection method is acceptable as long as it provides a reliable electrical and mechanical connection.
A customer's self-contained, separately-derived power system (computer power centers, transformers, motor
generators), installed on a raised floor, has the same requirements.
Power specifications
Your server is normally furnished with power-supply provision to meet the 50- or 60-Hz voltage standards
shown in the following tables, respectively.
General power information
19
Planning
Table 1. 50-Hz standard voltages
50-Hz nominal voltages
Single phase 100 110 200 220 230 240
Three phase 200 220 380 400 415
Table 2. 60-Hz standard voltages
60-Hz nominal voltages
Single phase 100 110 120 127 200 208 220 240 277
Three phase 200 208 220 240 480
Voltage and frequency limits
The phase-to-phase steady-state voltage must be maintained within plus 6 percent to minus 10 percent of the
normal rated voltage, measured at the receptacle when the system is operating. A voltage surge or sag
condition must not exceed plus 15 percent or minus 18 percent of the nominal voltage and must return to
within a steady-state tolerance of plus 6 percent or minus 10 percent of normal rated voltage within 0.5
second.
Some servers might require special considerations and might have more or less restrictive specifications. See
the individual server specifications for actual requirements. Because of the possibility of brownouts (planned
voltage reduction by the utility company) or other marginal voltage conditions, installing a voltage monitor
might be advisable.
The phase frequency must be maintained at 50 or 60 Hz + 0.5 Hz.
The value of any of the three phase-to-phase equipment voltages in the three-phase system must not differ by
more than 2.5 percent from the arithmetic average of the three voltages. All three line-to-line voltages must be
within the limits specified above.
The maximum total harmonic content of the power system voltage waveforms on the equipment feeder must
not exceed 5 percent with the equipment operating.
Power load
A preliminary sizing for the total power load can be obtained by adding the total power requirements for all
devices to be connected. For a more precise analysis of power distribution system requirements, you can
request a System Power Profile Program printout from your seller. The System Power Profile Program,
controlled and operated by the service office installation planning representative, provides a vector analysis
rather than an arithmetic summation of total power. The vector analysis takes into consideration power factor
and phase relationships. In addition, it considers waveform distortions caused by the load and inrush
requirements. Additional capacity should be planned for future expansion. Contact you service office
installation planning representative for information on how to obtain a System Power Profile.
Primary power problem areas
Your server is designed to operate on the normal power supplied by most electrical utility companies.
However, possible computer malfunctions can be caused by outside (radiated or conducted) transient
electrical noise signals being superimposed on the power line to the computer. To guard against this
interference, power distribution design should comply with the specifications discussed in this topic.
Failures caused by the power source are basically of three types:
20
General power information
Planning
• Power line disturbances, such as, short duration dips in voltage as well as prolonged outages. If the
frequency of such power failures is not acceptable for your operation, installing standby or buffered
power might be necessary.
• Transient electrical noise superimposed on power lines might be caused by a variety of industrial,
medical, communication, or other equipment:
♦ Within the computing facilities
♦ Adjacent to the computing facilities
♦ In the vicinity of the power company's distribution lines
◊ Switching large electrical loads can cause problems, even though the source is on a
different branch circuit. If you suspect such a condition, it might be advisable to
provide a separate, dedicated feeder or transformer for your server directly from your
power source.
If the transient-producing devices have been eliminated from the feeder and the computer room power panel
and power line disturbances are still present, it might be necessary for you to install isolation equipment (for
example, transformers, motor generators, or other power conditioning equipment).
Lightning protection
Installing lightning protection devices is recommended on the computer power source when:
• The primary power is supplied by an overhead power service.
• The utility company installs lightning protectors on the primary power source.
• The area is subject to electrical storms or an equivalent type of power surge.
Lightning protection for communication wiring
Be sure to install lightning protection devices to protect communication wiring and equipment from surges and
transients induced into the communication wiring. In any area subject to lightning, surge suppressors should
be installed at each end of every outdoor cable installation, whether installed above the ground (aerial) or
buried below the ground.
Information about lightning surge suppressors for communication wiring systems and recommended
installation methods for outdoor communication cables can be found in the manuals for the specific type of
data processing system that is being considered.
Power source
The primary power source is normally a wye-type or delta-type, three-phase service coming from a service
entrance or a separately derived source with appropriate overcurrent protection and suitable ground (service
entrance or building ground). A three-phase, five-wire power distribution system should be provided for
flexibility in your data processing installation. However, depending on the type of equipment installed, a
single-phase distribution system might be sufficient. The five wire system enables you to provide power for
three-phase line-to-line, single phase line-to-line, and single phase line-to-Neutral. The five wires consist of
three phase conductors, one neutral conductor, and one insulated equipment grounding conductor (green, or
green with yellow trace).
Conduit must not be used as the only grounding means.
Power plugs and receptacles are illustrated in the plugs and receptacles topic.
Power panel feeders
Ensure that the feeder wires to the branch-circuit distribution panel (shown in Grounding) are large enough to
handle the total server power load. It is recommended that these feeders service no other loads.
Branch circuits
The computer branch circuit panel should be in an unobstructed, well-lighted area in the computer room.
The individual branch circuits on the panel should be protected by suitable circuit breakers properly rated
according to manufacturer specifications and applicable codes. Each circuit breaker should be labeled to
identify the branch circuit it is controlling. The receptacle should also be labeled.
General power information
21
Planning
Where a branch circuit and receptacle are installed to service your server, it is recommended that the
grounding conductor of the branch circuit be insulated and equal in size to the phase conductors. The
grounding conductor is an insulated, dedicated-equipment-grounding conductor, not the neutral.
Branch circuit receptacles installed under a raised floor should be within 0.9 m (3 ft.) of the server that they
supply power to. If the branch circuits are contained in a metallic conduit, either rigid or nonrigid, the conduit
system should be grounded. This is accomplished by bonding the conduit to the power distribution panel,
which in turn, is tied to the building or transformer ground.
Power cords are supplied in 4.3 m (14 ft.) lengths unless otherwise noted in the server specifications. The
length is measured from the exit symbol on the plan views. Some power plugs furnished by your seller are
watertight, and should be located under the computer room raised floor.
Phase rotation
The three-phase power receptacles for some equipment, such as printers, must be wired for correct phase
rotation. When looking at the face of the receptacle and counting clockwise from the ground pin, the sequence
is phase 1, phase 2, and phase 3.
Emergency power control
A disconnecting means should be provided to disconnect the power from all electronic equipment in the
computer room. This disconnecting means should be controlled from locations readily accessible to the
operator at the principal exit doors. A similar disconnecting means to disconnect the air conditioning system
serving this area should be available. Consult the local and national codes to determine the requirements for
your installation. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) article 645 provides the requirements for this room EPO.
See also Precautions and Personnel Training.
Convenience outlets
A suitable number of convenience outlets should be installed in the computer room and the Service
Representative area for use by building maintenance personnel and service representatives. Convenience
outlets should be on the lighting or other building circuits, not on the computer power panel or feeder. Under
no circumstances are the service convenience outlets on your servers to be used for any purpose other than
normal servicing.
Dual-power installation configurations
Some server models are designed with a fully redundant power system. The possible power installation
configurations are:
• Dual power installation - Redundant distribution panel and switch
• Dual power installation - Redundant distribution panel
• Single distribution panel - Dual circuit breakers
Dual-power installation - Redundant distribution panel and switch
This configuration requires that the system receives power from two separate power distribution panels. Each
distribution panel receives power from a separate piece of building switch gear. This level of redundancy is
not available in most facilities.
Figure 1. Dual power installation - Redundant distribution panel and switch
22
General power information
Planning
Dual-power installation - Redundant distribution panel
This configuration requires that the system receives power from two separate power distribution panels. The
two distribution panels receive power from the same piece of building switch gear. Most facilities should be
able to achieve this level of redundancy.
Figure 1. Dual power installation - Redundant distribution panel
Single distribution panel - Dual circuit breakers
This configuration requires that the system receives power from two separate circuit breakers in a single
power panel. This configuration does not make full use of the redundancy provided by the processor. It is,
however, acceptable if a second power distribution panel is not available.
Figure 1. Single distribution panel - Dual circuit breakers
General power information
23
Planning
Air conditioning determination
The air conditioning system must provide year-round temperature and humidity control as a result of the heat
dissipated during equipment operation. Heat dissipation ratings are given in the server specifications for each
server. Air conditioning units should not be powered from the computer power panel because of the high
starting current drawn by their compressor units. The feeder line for the air conditioning system and the
computer room power should not be in the same conduit.
Consider the following factors when determining the air conditioning capacity necessary for installation:
• Information technology equipment heat dissipation
• Number of personnel
• Lighting requirements
• Amount of fresh air introduced
• Possible reheating of circulated air
• Heat conduction through outer walls and windows
• Ceiling height
• Area of floors
• Number and placement of door openings
• Number and height of partitions
Most servers are air-cooled by internal blowers. A separate air conditioning system is recommended for data
processing installation. A separate system might be required for small systems or individual servers intended
for operation when the building air conditioning system is not adequate or is not operational. Server heat
dissipation loads are given on the server specifications for each server. See the environmental requirements
in the server specifications for your server.
General guidelines for data centers
Refer to the latest ASHRAE publication, "Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments", dated
January, 2004. This document can be purchased online at ashrae.org. A dedicated section outlines a detailed
procedure for assessing the overall cooling health of the data center and optimizing for maximum cooling.
Server and storage considerations
Most servers and storage products are designed to pull chilled air through the front of the server and exhaust
hot air out of the back. The most important requirement is to ensure that the inlet air temperature to the front
of the equipment does not exceed environmental specifications. See the environmental requirements in the
server specifications or hardware specification sheets. Make sure that the air inlet and exit areas are not
blocked by paper, cables, or other obstructions. When upgrading or repairing your server, be sure not to
exceed, if specified, the maximum allowed time for having the cover removed with the unit running. After your
work is completed, be sure to reinstall all fans, heat sinks, air baffles, and other devices per your
documentation.
Manufacturers are reporting heat loads in a format suggested by the ASHRAE publication, "Thermal
Guidelines for Data Processing Environments", dated January, 2004. Although this data is meant to be used
to for heat load balancing, care is required when using the data to balance cooling supply and demand as
many applications are transient and do not dissipate constant rates of heat. A thorough understanding of how
the equipment and application behave with regard to heat load, including considerations for future growth, is
required.
Rack or cabinet considerations
Note: Racks are used throughout this section to also mean cabinets, frames, and any other commonly used
term to identify the unit that houses rack-mounted equipment.
The 19-inch racks are designed to allow maximum air flow through the equipment installed in the rack. Chilled
air is pulled through the front and exhausted through the rear by the fans in the rack-mounted equipment.
Most racks come with a perforated rear door and an optional front door that is perforated. Some racks have
optional acoustical treatment to reduce the noise emissions from the rack. If other racks are used, solid doors
or doors with significant amounts of decorative glass are not recommended as these will not allow sufficient
air to flow into and out of the rack.
24
Air conditioning determination
Planning
Recirculation of hot air exiting the back of the rack into the front of the rack must be eliminated. There are two
actions that can be taken to prevent air recirculation. First, filler or blanking panels must fill all unoccupied rack
space that is not occupied by equipment shipped in rack. 1U and 3U filler panels are used to block air
recirculation within the rack. If you do not have filler panels installed in your rack, these are available from
your seller.
Figure 1. 1U and 3U filler panel figure and part numbers
Index number
FRU part
number
Units per
assembly
Description
97H9754
As needed
1U Filler snap
(black)
62X3443
As needed
1U Filler snap
(white)
97H9755
As needed
3U Filler snap
(black)
62X3444
As needed
3U Filler snap
(white)
3
12J4072
As needed
1U Filler snap
(black)
4
12J4073
As needed
3U Filler snap
(black)
5
74F1823
2 per Item 3
M5 Nut clip
74F1823
4 per Item 4
M5 Nut clip
1624779
2 per Item 3
M5 X 14 Hex
flange
1624779
4 per Item 4
M5 X 14 Hex
flange
1
2
6
Second, allow proper operating clearance around all racks. See the clearance requirements in the server
specifications or hardware specification sheets. The floor layout should not allow the hot air exhaust from the
back of one rack to enter the front air inlet of another rack.
Finally, proper cable management is another important element of maximizing the air flow through the rack.
Cables must be routed and tied down in such a way that they do not impede the movement of air into or out of
the rack. Such impedance could significantly reduce the volumetric flow of air through the equipment.
Use a fan-assisted rack or cabinet with caution. Depending upon how much equipment is installed in the
cabinet, the air movers in the cabinet may limit the amount of flow to less than what is required by the
equipment.
Air conditioning determination
25
Planning
Room considerations
Data centers designed and built in the last 10 years are typically capable of cooling up to 3KW of heat load
per cabinet. These designs often involve raised floor air distribution plenums 18 to 24 inches in height, room
ceiling heights of 8 to 9 feet, and Computer Room Air Conditioning (CRAC) units distributed around the
perimeter of the room. IT equipment occupies roughly 30-35% of the total data center space. The remaining
space is white space (for example, access aisles, service clearances), power distribution units (PDUs), and
CRAC units. Until recently, little attention has been given to heat load assessments, equipment layout and air
delivery paths, heat load distribution, and floor tile placement and openings.
Assessing the total heat load of your installation
A total heat load assessment should be conducted to determine your overall environment balance point. The
purpose of the assessment is to see if you have enough sensible cooling, including redundancy, to handle the
heat load that you plan to install or have installed. There are several ways to perform this assessment, but the
most common is to review the heat load and cooling in logical sections defined by I-beams, air flow blockages,
or CRAC unit locations.
Equipment layout and air delivery paths
The seller recommends the hot-aisle, cold-aisle arrangement that is explained in the ASHRAE publication,
"Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments", dated January, 2004. In the following figure, racks
within the data center are arranged such that there are cold aisles and hot aisles. The cold aisle consists of
perforated floor tiles separating two rows of racks. The chilled air from the perforated floor tiles is exhausted
from the tiles and is drawn into the fronts of the racks. The inlets of each rack (front of each rack) face the cold
aisle. This arrangement allows the hot air exhausting the rear of the racks to return to the CRAC units; thus,
minimizing hot exhaust air from the rack circulating back into the inlets of the racks. CRAC units are placed at
the end of the hot aisles to facilitate the return of the hot air to the CRAC unit and maximize static pressure to
the cold aisle.
Figure 2. Hot aisle and cold aisle arrangement
The key to heat load management of the data center is to provide inlet air temperatures to the rack that meet
the manufacturer's specifications. Because the chilled air exhausting from the perforated tiles in the cold aisle
may not satisfy the total chilled air flow required by the rack, additional flow will be drawn from other areas of
the raised floor and may not be chilled. See the following figure. In many cases, the air flow drawn into the top
of the rack, after the bottom of the rack has been satisfied, will be a mixture of hot air from the rear of the
system and air from other areas. For those racks that are at the ends of a row, the hot air flow that exhausts
from the rear of the rack and migrate to the front around the sides of the rack. These flow patterns have been
observed in actual data centers and in flow modeling.
Figure 3. Possible rack air flow patterns
26
Air conditioning determination
Planning
For a data center that may not have the best chilled-air-flow distribution, the following figure gives guidance in
providing adequate chilled air flow given a specific heat load. The chart takes into account worst-case
locations in a data center and are the requirements to meet the maximum temperature specifications required
by most high-end equipment. Altitude corrections are noted on the bottom portion of the chart.
Figure 4. High-end equipment chilled air flow and temperature requirements
The most common methods for delivering supply air to the racks can be found in System air distribution.
Heat load distribution
Increased performance capabilities and the accompanying heat load demands have caused data centers to
have hot spots in the vicinity of heat loads that exceed 3KW. Facility owners are discovering that it is
becoming increasingly difficult to plan cooling schemes for large-scale deployments of high-heat-load
equipment. Essentially, two different approaches can be undertaken for a large-scale, high-end server or
storage deployment:
1. Provide ample cooling for maximum heat load requirements across the entire data center.
2. Provide an average amount of cooling across the data center with the capability to increase cooling in
limited, local areas.
Option 1 is very expensive and more conducive to new construction. For option 2, a number of things can be
done to optimize cooling in existing data centers and possibly raise the cooling capability in limited sections.
One recommendation is to place floor tiles with high percent-open and flow ratings in front of the high-end
racks. Another recommendation is to provide special means for removing hot exhaust air from the backs of
the high-end racks immediately, before it has a chance to migrate back to the air intakes on racks in other
parts of the room. This could be accomplished by installing special baffling or direct ducting back to the air
returns on the CRAC units. Careful engineering is required to ensure that any recommendation does not have
an adverse effect on the dynamics of the underfloor static pressure and air flow distribution.
In centers where floor space is not an issue, it would be most practical to design the entire raised floor to a
constant level of cooling and depopulate racks or observe a greater distance between racks in order to meet
the per-cabinet capability of the floor.
Floor tile placement and openings
Air conditioning determination
27
Planning
Perforated tiles should be placed exclusively in the cold aisles, aligned with the intakes of the equipment. No
perforated tiles should be placed in the hot aisles, no matter how uncomfortably hot. Hot aisles are, by design,
supposed to be hot. Placement of open tiles in the hot aisle artificially decreases the return air temperature to
the CRAC units, thereby reducing their efficiency and available capacity. This phenomenon contributes to hot
spot problems in the data center. Perforated tiles should not be placed in too close proximity to the CRAC
units. In areas under the raised floor where air velocities exceed about 530 feet-per-minute, usually within
about six tiles of the unit discharges, a Venturi effect may be created where room air will be sucked downward
into the raised floor, opposite of the desired result of upward chilled air delivery.
The volumetric flow capabilities of floor tiles with various percent-open ratings are shown in figure 5.
Figure 5. Volumetric flow capabilities of various raised floor tiles
Floor tiles in typical data centers deliver between 100 and 300 cfm. By optimizing the flow utilizing some of the
guidelines set forth in this document, it may be possible to realize flows as high as 500 cfm. Flow rates as
high as 700-800 cfm per tile are possible with tiles with the highest percent-open rating. Floor tiles must be
aligned in the cold aisles with the intake locations on the equipment.
Openings in the raised-floor that are not there for the purpose of delivering chilled air directly to the equipment
in the data center space should be completely sealed with brush assemblies or other cable opening material
(for example, foam sheeting, fire pillows). Other openings that must be sealed are holes in data center
perimeter walls, underfloor, and ceiling. Sealing all openings will help maximize under-floor static pressure,
ensure optimal air flow to the cold aisles where it is needed, and eliminate short-circuiting of unused air to the
CRAC unit returns.
Temperature and humidity design criteria
The information technology equipment can tolerate a considerable range of temperature and humidity, as
described in the server specifications for each server. Generally, the air conditioning system should be
designed for 22 degrees C (71.6 degrees F) and 45 percent relative humidity at altitudes up to 2150 m (7000
ft.). This design point provides for the largest buffer in terms of available system time. If the air conditioning
system fails or malfunctions, the computer will be able to operate until it reaches its specified limits. This
buffer provides additional time for air conditioning repairs before the computer must be shut down. The design
point has also been proven to be a generally acceptable personal comfort level.
The design points for temperature and relative humidity might differ in certain geographical areas.
Air conditioning control instruments that respond to + or - 1 degree C ( + or - 2 degrees F) temperature and +
or - 5 percent relative humidity should be installed.
Computer room cooling is basically a sensible (as opposed to a latent) cooling operation. (Sensible heat is
defined as the transfer of thermal energy to or from a substance resulting in a change in temperature: Latent
heat is the thermal energy absorbed or evolved in a process other than change of temperature.)
Substantial deviations from the recommended design point in either direction, if maintained for long periods
(that is, for hours), will expose the system to malfunction from external conditions. For example, high relative
humidity levels might cause improper feeding of paper, operator discomfort, and condensation on windows
and walls when outside temperatures fall below room dew point.
28
Temperature and humidity design criteria
Planning
Low relative humidity levels alone will not cause static discharge. However, in combination with many types of
floor construction, floor coverings, and furniture, static charges that are generated by movement of people,
carts, furniture, and paper will be more readily stored on one or more of the objects. These charges might be
high enough to be objectionable to operating personnel, if discharged by contact with another person or
object. If discharged to or near information technology equipment or other electronic equipment, these
charges can cause intermittent interference. In most areas, it will be necessary to add moisture to the room air
to meet the design criteria.
Because temperature or relative humidity deviations for only a few hours will cause the floors, desks, furniture,
cards, tapes, and paper to reach a condition that will readily permit the retention of a charge, it is
recommended that the air conditioning system be automatically controlled and provided with a high or low
alarm or a continuous recording device with the appropriate limits marked.
Server operating limits
Some individual servers might require special consideration and have more or less restrictive requirements.
See your server specifications for specific environmental limits.
The typical server operating environment is shown in the following table. The server nonoperating limits are
shown in the following Nonoperating Server Limits table.
Table 1. Typical server operating environment
Computer room limits
Office space air conditioned
Office space not air conditioned
Temperature
16 to 32 degrees C (60.8 to 16 to 32 degrees C (60.8 to
89.6 degrees F)
89.6degrees F)
10.0 to 40.6 degrees C (50 to
105.08 degrees F)
Relative
humidity
20 to 80 percent
8 to 80 percent
Maximum wet
bulb
23 degrees C (73.4 degrees 23 degrees C (73.4 degrees
F)
F)
8 to 80 percent
27.0 degrees C (80.6 degrees
F)
The design criteria is shown is the following table.
Table 2. Design criteria
Design criteria
Temperature
22 degrees C (71.6 degrees F)
Relative humidity
45 percent
Maximum wet bulb 23 degrees C (73.4 degrees F)
Figure 1. Recommended design
Temperature and humidity design criteria
29
Planning
The recommended design is shown in the figure above.
Note: The air entering the server must be at the conditions for operation before power is turned on. Under no
circumstances may the server's input air, room air, or humidity exceed the upper limit of the operating
conditions. This is the maximum operating temperature limit and should not be considered a design condition.
Also, the relative humidity of the air entering the server should not be greater than 80 percent. This
specification is an absolute maximum. The optimum condition is where the room is at the design criteria of 22
degrees C (71.6 degrees F) and 45 percent humidity.
Air temperature in a duct or an underflow air supply should be kept above the room dew point temperature to
prevent condensation within or on the servers. When it is necessary to add moisture to the system for control
of low relative humidity, one of the following methods should be used:
• Steam grid or jets
• Evaporation pan or pane
• Steam cup
• Water atomizers
Water treatment might be necessary in areas with high mineral content to avoid contamination of the air.
Note: In localities where the outside temperature drops below freezing, condensation will form on single,
glazed window panes. Also, if outside temperatures are considerably below freezing, the outside walls of the
building should be waterproofed or vapor sealed on the inside or, in time, structural damage will occur in the
outside walls.
Server nonoperating limits
When the facilities are shut down, the nonoperating environmental specifications must be followed to prevent
damage to the server and to ensure reliable operation when power is restored.
Table 3. Nonoperating server limits
Server nonoperating limits
Temperature
10 to 43 degrees C (50 to 109.4 degrees F)
Relative humidity
8 to 80 percent
Maximum wet bulb 27 degrees C (80.6 degrees F)
Temperature and humidity recording instruments
It is recommended that temperature and humidity recording instruments be installed to provide a continuous
record of the environmental conditions.
Direct-reading instruments with 7-day charts are suggested to monitor the ambient room conditions. Any
under-floor air conditioning supply should also be monitored.
Monitoring provides the ability to:
• Assure the air conditioning system is continuously performing as designed.
• Determine whether a mandatory drying-out period is necessary when the humidity limitations are
30
Temperature and humidity recording instruments
Planning
exceeded. The duration of the drying-out period is determined by the extent and duration of excess
humidity.
• Determine whether a mandatory warm-up period is necessary when the building temperature has
dropped below server operating specifications during off-shift hours.
A visual or audible signal should be incorporated with the recording instrument to alert personnel that ambient
conditions are approaching the maximum limitations.
Relocation and temporary storage
Shipment or storage conditions that exceed the specified limits can cause permanent damage. Care should
be taken to ensure that a server is not stored with chemicals that can cause corrosion damage.
When a server is removed in preparation for shipment or storage, use the packaging bill of material. This
might include a protective package, including blocks, braces, and preparation instructions, designed uniquely
for each server. Some large processors are designed for operation in a controlled temperature and relative
humidity range, and require the environment be kept within this range even when they are in a storage area or
in transit. See the individual server specifications for operating environment limits. Shipment of large
processors should be in an environmentally controlled van with appropriate strapping and padding to avoid
any transit damage.
Table 1. Typical shipping environment
Shipping environment
Temperature
-40 to 60 degrees C (-40 to 140 degrees F)
Relative humidity
5 to 100 percent (no condensation)
Maximum wet bulb 1 to 27 degrees C (33.8 to 80.6 degrees F)
If shipping a large processor in a nonenvironmentally controlled van, contact your seller for packing and
unpacking instructions.
Table 2. Typical storage environment
Storage environment
Temperature
1 to 60 degrees C (33.8 to 140 degrees F)
Relative humidity
5 to 80 percent
Maximum wet bulb 1 to 29 degrees C (33.8 to 84.2 degrees F)
Acclimation
When server and storage equipment is shipped in a climate where the outside temperature is below the dew
point of an indoor location, there is a possibility that water condensation will form on the cooler surfaces inside
the equipment when brought into a warmer indoor environment. If condensation occurs, sufficient time must
be allowed for the equipment to reach equilibrium with the warmer indoor temperature before removing the
shipping bag, if used. Leave the system in the shipping bag, if used, for up to 48 hours, or until there is no
visible signs of condensation, to let it acclimate to the indoor environment.
Relocation and temporary storage
31
Planning
System air distribution
Careful attention should be given to the method of air distribution to eliminate areas of excessive air motion
and hot spots.
Regardless of the type of system, it should use predominantly recirculated air with a set minimum of fresh air
for personnel. This helps eliminate the introduction of dust, reduces the latent load, and allows the system to
carry on a sensible cooling operation. The various methods of air distribution and computer room air
conditioning (CRAC) are shown in the following figures.
In general you should ensure that the design supply and return air temperatures are within the manufacturer's
specifications for CRAC units.
Underfloor air distribution
In underfloor air distribution, the space between the regular building floor and the raised floor is used as a
means to supply air for equipment cooling (see the following figure). Concrete subfloors might require
treatment to prevent the release of dust. Air is discharged into the room through perforated panel floor
registers. The air is returned directly to the air conditioning system or by means of a ceiling return system.
Remove obsolete cabling (as required in the United States National Electrical Code) and seal all raised-floor
openings that are not specifically intended to supply cool air to equipment intakes.
Figure 1. Underfloor air distribution
A higher return air temperature can be tolerated in underfloor air distribution without affecting the design
conditions of the overall room. The underfloor design takes into consideration a heat transfer factor through
the raised metal floor and also provides some reheated air to control the relative humidity before it enters the
room.
A temperature control system would consist of the same controls as described for the single duct system. In
addition, the system must have controls for air temperature in the under floor supply system to prevent under
floor temperatures from getting below the room dew point. Air entering the server through the cable holes
must be within operating limits. (See Server operating limits).
Combination overhead and under floor system
For a combination overhead and under floor air circulation design, the primary air conditioning unit is inside
the room and the secondary air conditioning unit is outside the room. See following figure.
Figure 2. Combination overhead and underfloor air conditioning system
An air handler, with separate controls, supplies conditioned and filtered air to the area under the raised floor.
The air is discharged into the room through floor panels or registers. This air absorbs the heat generated by
32
System air distribution
Planning
the server and is discharged from the top or rear of the servers into the room. The relative humidity of the air
supplied to the information technology equipment should be below 80 percent and the temperature should be
controlled to prevent condensation on or within the servers. It might be necessary to provide for a reheating
system to operate with the cooling unit to control relative humidity.
The second air handling system supplies air directly to the room through a separate supply system and should
be large enough to absorb the remaining heat load in the computer room. It should maintain room
temperature and relative humidity as specified and give continuous air conditioning and ventilation.
Overhead air circulation
In overhead air circulation, the entire heat load of the room or area, including the heat generated by the
information technology equipment, is absorbed by the air supplied to the computer room and the area diffuser
system or by a pressurized ceiling supply.
The air returned to the air conditioning system is from either ceiling return registers above the heat-producing
servers, or from a fixed pattern of return registers both in the ceiling and on the walls of the room. The
following figure shows an overhead air circulation system.
Figure 3. Overhead air distribution system
To maximize the cooling capability of such an arrangement, it is imperative to align the supply discharges with
the cold aisles and the return grilles with the hot aisles. The supply discharges should force air directly down
into the cold aisles and not use diffusers that distribute air laterally. Such diffusion can cause cool air to
migrate undesirably into the return air path prior to having the opportunity to transfer heat from the equipment.
A temperature control system should consist of temperature and humidity controls. These controls should be
placed in a representative location within the machine room. The temperature and humidity recorder
(described in the Temperature and humidity design criteria topic) should be mounted next to the controls to
monitor conditions.
Air filtration
A high efficiency filter should be installed to filter all air supplied to the computer room. Because mechanical
and electrostatic air cleaners operate on different principles, a different rating is specified for each type.
Ratings are determined by using the test methods outlined in the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard No. 52-76 (or national equivalent). Special air filtration is
necessary where installations are exposed to corrosive gases, salt air, or unusual dirt or dust conditions.
Mechanical air filters must be rated at a minimum initial atmospheric dust-spot efficiency of 40 percent.
Electrostatic air filters are designed to operate at 85 to 90 percent efficiency at a given face velocity. The filter
must be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent bypass and ozone
buildup, which can be detrimental to certain servers.
Air quality
If you are installing your system in a typical business office or clean industrial location, you probably do not
have to worry about the quality of the surrounding air. However, if your site is unusually dirty or has a
chemical odor, you should be concerned. Dirt and corrosive gases can cause corrosion and possible
equipment damage.
High concentrations of gases such as sulfur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, ozone, and acidic gaseous chlorine
associated with industrial processes are known to cause corrosion and failure of electronic components. If you
have any reason to suspect the presence of a corrosive gas (for example, the presence of an odor),
determine what contaminant is in the air and whether it is in high enough concentrations to be harmful to your
System air distribution
33
Planning
system. In addition to gases, some industrial processes produce particulate contamination. These particles
can settle (in the form of dust) in surrounding areas even though the process producing the particles might be
some distance away.
Testing for gases and particulate in the air involves special equipment and procedures. Your seller can
provide guidance.
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
This topic provides information for preparing your location to facilitate the use of the Rear Door Heat
Exchanger for 7014-T42.
The rear door heat exchanger is a water-cooled device that mounts on the rear of 19-inch EIA-rail and 24-inch
EIA-rail Enterprise racks to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply
hose delivers chilled, conditioned water to the heat exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back to
the water pump or chiller. This is referred to as a secondary cooling loop. The primary cooling loop supplies
the building chilled water to secondary cooling loops, air conditioning units, and so on. The hoses for the
secondary cooling loop are not included with the rear door heat exchanger kit. The rack on which you install
this cooling feature can be on a raised floor or a non-raised floor. Each rear door heat exchanger can remove
up to 50 000 Btu/hr (or approximately 15 000 watts) of heat from your data center.
Suggestions for sources of hoses, water treatment and cooling distribution units for supplying conditioned
water are provided under Suggested sources for secondary loop components.
The following topics provide the detailed planning specifications for the rear door heat exchanger
environment.
• Rear door heat exchanger specifications
• Water specifications for the secondary cooling loop
• Water delivery specifications for secondary loops
• Layout and mechanical installation
Planning considerations overview
High-level planning considerations for the rear door heat exchanger are as follows.
1. Provide chilled, conditioned water to the heat exchangers that meets the specifications outlined in
Water specifications for the secondary cooling loop.
2. Procure and install the water supply system that is suitable for your data center. Details are provided
in Water delivery specifications for secondary loops
3. Provide floor tile cutouts on raised floors, or protective coverings to avoid trip hazards on non-raised
floors as part of hose management.
Heat exchanger specifications
The following are the specifications for the rear door heat exchanger.
Table 1. Operating specifications for 19-inch EIA-rail rear door heat exchanger
Door size
• Depth: 142.6 mm
(5.6 in.)
34
Air movement
Water source
• Provided by servers and other
devices in the rack
• User-supplied,
compliant with
specifications in this
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
• Height: 1945.4 mm
Air source for servers
(76.6 in.)
• Width: 639 mm (25.2
• Room air for front of rack. Air
in.)
exhausts servers, moves through
rear door heat exchanger and exits
Exchanger size
into the room (open loop)
• Depth: 67 mm (2.6
in.)
• Height: 1791.3 mm
(70.5 in.)
• Width: 438.6 mm
(17.3 in.)
Door assembly weight
• Empty: 29.9 kg (66
lb.)
• Filled: 35.6 kg (78.5
lb.)
topic.
Water pressure
• Normal operation:
137.93 kPa (20 psi)
• Maximum: 689.66 kPa
(100 psi)
• Pressure drop across
heat exchanger:
approximately 48 kPa
(7 psi)
Air temperature drop
• The temperature drop can be up to
25 degrees C (45 degrees F)
between the air exiting the rack
devices and the air exiting the heat
exchanger on high heat load
products.
Water volume
• Exchanger: 2.8 liters
(0.75 gallons)
• Exchanger plus supply
and return hoses to the
pump unit: Maximum
of approximately 15.1
liters (4.0 gallons)
excluding pump unit
piping and reservoir
Air impedance
• Air pressure drop across the rear
door heat exchanger is equivalent to
the acoustic 19-inch rear door
Door heat removal capacity
• Lab tests indicate 50
to 60 percent of total
rack heat output can
be removed by the
door
• Up to 15 kW (50 000
Btu/hr) heat removal
possible
Water temperature
• If no dew point control
is available from the
secondary loop cooling
distribution unit, 18
degrees C +/- 1 degree
C (64.4 degrees F +/1.8 degrees F) must be
maintained.
• Lower temperature
water is allowed as
long as the water
supply is monitored
and adjusted to remain
above room dew point
(where rear door heat
exchanger is located).
Required water flow rate (as
measured at the supply
entrance to the heat
exchanger)
• Minimum: 22.7 liters
per minute (6 gallons
per minute)
• Maximum: 37.9 liters
per minute (10 gallons
per minute)
Table 2. Operating specifications for 24-inch EIA-rail rear door heat exchanger
Door size
• Depth: 142.6 mm (5.6
in.)
Air movement
• Provided by servers and other
devices in the rack
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Water source
• User-supplied,
compliant with
specifications in this
35
Planning
• Height: 1945.4 mm
(76.6 in.)
• Width: 771.8 mm
(34.4 in.)
Exchanger size
• Depth: 67 mm (2.6
in.)
• Height: 1791.3 mm
(70.5 in.)
• Width: 574.6 mm
(22.6 in.)
Door assembly weight
• Empty: 31.7 kg (70
lb.)
• Filled: 39.9 kg (88.2
lb.)
Door heat removal capacity
• Lab tests indicate 10
percent improvement
over the 19-inch
version of the door.
• Up to 17 kW (58 000
Btu/hr) heat removal
possible
Air source for servers
• Room air for front of rack. Air
exhausts servers, moves through
rear door heat exchanger and exits
into the room (open loop)
Air temperature drop
Water pressure
• The temperature drop can be up to
25 degrees C (45 degrees F)
between the air exiting the rack
devices and the air exiting the heat
exchanger on high heat load
products.
Air impedance
topic.
• 3/4-inch couplings on
floor
• Minimum 3/4-inch
inside diameter hose
required
• Normal operation:
137.93 kPa (20 psi)
• Maximum: 689.66 kPa
(100 psi)
• Pressure drop across
heat exchanger:
approximately 48 kPa
(7 psi)
• Air pressure drop across the rear
Water volume
door heat exchanger is equivalent to
the acoustic 24-inch rear door
• Exchanger: 5.3 liters
(1.4 gallons)
• Exchanger plus supply
and return hoses to
the pump unit:
Maximum of
approximately 15.1
liters (4.0 gallons)
excluding pump unit
piping and reservoir
Water temperature
• If no dew point control
is available from the
secondary loop cooling
distribution unit, 18
degrees C +/- 1
degree C (64.4
degrees F +/- 1.8
degrees F) must be
maintained.
• Lower temperature
water is allowed as
long as the water
supply is monitored
and adjusted to remain
above room dew point
(where rear door heat
exchanger is located).
Required water flow rate (as
measured at the supply
entrance to the heat
exchanger)
• Minimum: 22.7 liters
per minute (6 gallons
per minute)
• Maximum: 37.9 liters
per minute (10 gallons
per minute)
36
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
Rear door heat exchanger option kit
The rear door heat exchanger feature kit consists of the components listed below and shown in the following
figures.
• Door assembly
• Hinge kit
• Air-purge tool
Figure 1. Components of the heat exchanger kit for 19-inch EIA-rail racks
Figure 2. Components of the heat exchanger kit for 24-inch EIA-rail racks
Water specifications for the secondary cooling loop
It is important that the water being supplied to the heat exchanger meet the requirements described in this
topic; otherwise, system failures might occur over time, as a result of:
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
37
Planning
• Leaks due to corrosion and pitting of the metal components of the heat exchanger or the water supply
system
• Buildup of scale deposits inside the heat exchanger, which can cause the following problems:
♦ A reduction of the heat exchanger s ability to cool the air that is exhausted from the rack.
♦ Failure of mechanical hardware, such as a hose quick-connect adapter.
• Organic contamination, such as bacteria, fungi, or algae. This contamination can cause the same
problems as described for scale deposits.
Water control and conditioning for the secondary cooling loop
The water used to fill, refill, and supply the heat exchanger must be particle-free deionized water or
particle-free distilled water with appropriate controls for avoiding the following issues.
• Metal corrosion
• Bacterial fouling
• Scaling
Because of typical water temperatures (described in Water delivery specifications for secondary loops), the
water may not be able to originate from the primary, building, chilled-water system. Conditioned water for the
rear door heat exchanger should be supplied as part of a secondary, closed-loop system.
Important: Use of glycol solutions is not recommended because they can adversely affect the cooling
performance of the heat exchanger.
Materials for secondary loops
This topic describes the materials for use in supply lines, connectors, manifolds, pumps, hoses, and any other
hardware that makes up the closed-loop water-supply system at your location.
• Copper
• Brass with less than 30 percent zinc content
• Stainless steel
303, 304, or 316
• Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber
peroxide cured, non-metal oxide
Materials to avoid in secondary loops
Do not use any of the following materials in any part of your water supply system.
• Oxidizing biocides, such as, chlorine, bromine, and chlorine dioxide
• Aluminum
• Brass with greater than 30 percent zinc
• Irons (non-stainless steel)
Water supply requirements for secondary loops
38
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
This topic describes specific characteristics of the system that supplies the chilled conditioned water to the
heat exchanger.
Temperature
The heat exchanger, its supply hose and return hoses are not insulated and do not have features designed to
address the creation and collection water from condensate. Avoid any condition that could cause
condensation. The temperature of the water inside the supply hose, return hose, and the heat exchanger must
be kept above the dew point of the location where the heat exchanger is being used.
Attention: Typical primary chilled water is too cold for use in this application because building chilled water
can be as cold as 4 - 6 degrees C (39 to 43 degrees F).
Important: If the system supplying the cooling water does not have the ability to measure the room dew point
and automatically adjust the water temperature accordingly, the minimum water temperature that must be
maintained is 18 degrees C plus or minus 1 degree C(64.4 degrees F plus or minus 1.8 degrees F). This is
consistent with the ASHRAE Class 1 Environmental Specification that requires a maximum dew point of 17
degrees C (62.6 degrees F). Refer to the ASHRAE document entitled Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing
Environments. Information on obtaining this document is found at www.ashrae.org. Search on document id
ASHRAE TC 9.9.
Pressure
The water pressure in the secondary loop must be less than the maximum 689.66 kPa (100 pounds per
square inch). Somewhere in the water circuit, a pressure relief valve, set to this maximum value, is required
for safety reasons. Normal operating pressure at the rear door heat exchanger should be 137.93 kPa (20 psi)
or less.
Flow rate
The flow rate of the water in the system must be in the range of 23 - 38 liters per minute (6 - 10 gallons per
minute).
Pressure drop versus flow rate for heat exchangers (including quick-connect couplings) is defined as
approximately 48 kPa (7 psi) at 30 liters per minute (8 gallons per minute). Adjustable flow valves are
recommended for installation on all supply lines of the water circuit, to enable compliance, to this flow
specification.
Water volume limits
The heat exchangers hold between 2.8 liters (0.75 gallons) and 5.3 liters (1.4 gallons). Fifteen meters (50 ft.)
of 19 mm (0.75 in.) supply and return hoses hold approximately 9.4 liters (2.5 gallons). To minimize exposure
to flooding in the event of leaks, the entire product cooling system (heat exchanger, supply hose and return
hose) excluding any reservoir tank should have a maximum 15.1 liters (4 gallons) of water. This is a
cautionary statement not a functional requirement. Also consider using leak detection methods on the
secondary loop that supplies water to the heat exchanger.
Air exposure
The secondary cooling loop is a closed loop, with no continuous exposure to room air. After you fill the loop,
remove all air from the loop. Air bleed valves are provided at the top of each heat exchanger manifold for
purging all air from the system.
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
39
Planning
Water delivery specifications for secondary loops
This topic describes the various hardware components that make up the delivery system secondary loop that
provides the chilled, conditioned water to the rear door heat exchanger. The delivery system includes pipes,
hoses and the required connection hardware to attach to the heat exchanger. Hose management on raised or
non-raised floor environments is also described.
The rear door heat exchanger can remove 50-60 percent of the heat load from an individual rack when water
is supplied to at 18 degrees C (64 degrees F) and the door is running under optimum conditions. For sizing
purposes, consider a rack that produces a heat load of X watts. The heat exchanger can remove 0.5X watts
before the heated air enters the room.
The primary cooling loop is considered to be the low temperature building chilled-water supply or a modular
chiller unit. The primary loop must not be used as a direct source of coolant for the rear door heat exchanger
for two main reasons. First, below-dew-point water will cause air moisture to form on the door heat exchanger
as it operates (condensation will drip and gather under the rack). Second, if proper leak detection is not
established (for example, monitored leak tape, hose-in-trough with leak sensors and automatic shut-off
valves) and a leak in the door, hoses or manifolds occurs, the constant, large supply of primary loop water
could result in large amounts of water leaking into the data center. Water provided in a controlled and
monitored secondary, closed loop, would limit the amount of water available in a leak situation, and prevent
condensation from forming.
Procurement and the installation of the components needed to create the secondary cooling loop system are
required for this design and are your responsibility. For suggestions on where to procure hoses and cooling
distribution units, see Flexible hose suppliers and Cooling distribution unit suppliers. The main purpose of this
topic is to provide examples of typical methods for secondary loop set-up and operating characteristics that
are needed to provide an adequate, safe supply of water to the rear door heat exchanger. Key components
recommended for the water supply and return liness are:
• couplings to match those provided on the rear door heat exchanger
• flexible hoses
• thermal feedback to a flow valve that will adjust and control supply water temperature
• pressure relief valve
• shutoff valves for each line running to a door
• adjustable flow valves for each supply line to a door.
The actual number of rear door heat exchangers connected to a secondary loop depends on the capacity of
the secondary loop to transfer heat to the primary loop. For example, if the secondary loop can remove 100
kW of heat load and you have multiple 25 kW racks, you could have 12.5 kW per rack (assuming 50 percent
door heat removal) going into the water loop, and attach eight doors per secondary loop.
The following figure shows an example of a facilities fabricated solution. The actual number of rear door heat
exchangers connected to a secondary loop depends on the capacity of the cooling distribution unit that is
running the secondary loop.
Figure 1. Coolant distribution using a fabricated facilities solution
The following figure shows an example of an off-the-shelf modular cooling distribution unit. The actual number
of rear door heat exchangers connected to a secondary loop depends on the capacity of the cooling
distribution unit that is running the secondary loop.
40
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
Figure 2. Coolant distribution using off-the-shelf supplier solutions
The following figure shows a typical cooling solution and defines the components of the primary cooling loop
and the components of the secondary cooling loop.
Figure 3. Primary and secondary cooling loops
Manifolds and piping
Manifolds that accept large-diameter feed pipes from a pump unit are the preferred method for splitting the
flow of water to smaller diameter pipes or hoses that are routed to individual rear door heat exchangers.
Manifolds must be constructed of materials compatible with the pump unit and related piping. See Materials
for secondary loops. The manifolds must provide enough connection points to allow a matching number of
supply and return lines to be attached and the manifolds must match the capacity rating of the pumps and
heat exchanger (between the secondary cooling loop and building chilled-water source). Anchor or restrain all
manifolds to provide the required support to avoid movement when quick-connect couplings are plugged to
the manifolds and when valves are opened or closed.
Example manifold supply pipe sizes
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
41
Planning
• Use a 50.8 mm (2 in.) supply pipe to provide the correct flow to six (100 kW CDU) 19 mm (0.75 in.)
supply hoses.
• Use a 63.5 mm (2.50 in.) supply pipe to provide the correct flow to eight (120 kW CDU) 19 mm (0.75
in.) supply hoses.
• Use an 88.9 mm (3.50 in.) supply pipe to provide the correct flow to twenty (300 kW CDU) 19 mm
(0.75 in.) supply hoses.
Shutoff valves are suggested for each supply and return line that exits the manifold to allow stopping the flow
of water in individual lines of multiple circuit loops. This provides a way of servicing or replacing an individual
heat exchanger without affecting the operation of other heat exchangers in the loop.
Adjustable flow valves (called circuit setters) are also suggested for each supply line that exits a supply
manifold so changes can be made to the flow to each individual rack, in the event that door heat exchangers
are added or removed from the secondary loop (this method keeps water flow within specification to each
door heat exchanger).
Temperature and flow metering (monitoring) are suggested in secondary loops, to provide assurance that
water specifications are being met and that the optimum heat removal is taking place.
Anchor or restrain all manifolds and pipes to provide the required support, and to avoid movement when
quick-connect couplings are being attached to the manifolds.
The following figure shows an example of a typical central manifold layout that supplies water to multiple heat
exchangers.
Figure 4. Typical central distribution manifold layout in a central location
The following figure shows another layout for multiple water circuits.
Figure 5. Typical central manifold (located at a central location for multiple water circuits)
The following figure shows an extended manifold layout.
42
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
Figure 6. Typical extended manifold (located along aisles between racks)
Flexible hoses and connections to manifolds and heat exchangers
Pipes and hose configurations can vary and are determined by analyzing the needs of your facilities, or a site
preparation representative can provide this analysis.
Flexible hoses are needed to supply and return water between your hard plumbing (manifolds and cooling
distribution units) and the rear door heat exchanger, (allowing needed movement when opening and closing
the rack rear door).
Hoses are available that provide water with acceptable pressure-drop characteristics and that help prevent
depletion of some corrosion inhibitors. These hoses must be made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
(EPDM) rubber - peroxide cured, non-metal oxide material and will have Parker Fluid quick-connect couplings
at each end. These couplings are defined below and are compatible with the heat exchanger couplings. Hose
lengths from 3 to 15 m (10 ft. to 50 ft.), in increments of 3 m (10 ft.) are available. Hoses longer than 15 m (50
ft.) may create unacceptable pressure loss in the secondary circuit and reduce the water flow, and thus
reduce the heat removal capabilities of the heat exchanger.
For a suggested supplier of these hoses, see Flexible hose suppliers. Use solid piping or tubing that has a
minimum inner diameter of 19 mm (0.75 in.) and the least number of joints possible between a manifold and a
heat exchanger in each secondary loop.
Quick-connect couplings are used to attach the hoses or fixed pipes to the distribution manifolds and the rear
door heat exchangers. Hose couplings that attach to the heat exchanger must have the following
characteristics.
• The couplings should be constructed of passivated 300-L series stainless steel or brass couplings
with less than 30 percent zinc content. The coupling size is 19 mm (0.75 in.).
• The supply hose must have a Parker (male) quick-coupling nipple part number SH6-63-W, or
equivalent. The return hose must have a Parker (female) quick-conect couplings part number
SH6-62-W, or equivalent.
• At the opposite (manifold) end of the hoses, it is suggested that similar quick-connect couplings be
used. However, if other types are desired, it is also suggested that positive locking mechanisms be
used to prevent loss of water when the hoses are disconnected. The connections must minimize
water spill and air inclusion into the system when they are disconnected.
Note: When creating supply and return loops, it is recommended to avoid placement of electrical connections
directly below water connections. These would be areas prone to water drips or splash when working with the
water loop. Water dripping or splashing onto electrical connections can cause electrical problems or an unsafe
environment.
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
43
Planning
Layout and mechanical installation
This topic provides an overview of the installation steps. The topics described are:
• Rear door heat exchanger installation overview
• Planning for rear door heat exchangers in a raised-floor environment
• Planning for rear door heat exchangers in a non-raised floor environment
It also provides examples of typical layouts for water circuits. For detailed information about installing a heat
exchanger, see Installing the rear door heat exchanger.
Rear door heat exchanger installation overview
Installing the rear door heat exchanger consists of the following major tasks:
1. Preparing your facility to provide water to the rack per the required specifications.
2. Removing the existing rack rear door, and installing new hinge assemblies, and installing new latch
plate.
3. Attaching the heat exchanger door assembly to the rack.
4. Routing flexible hoses, leaving enough length at the rack end to easily make connections to the heat
exchanger.
5. Connecting the water-supply and water-return hose that runs from the cooling distribution unit or
distribution manifold to the heat exchanger.
6. Filling the heat exchanger with water.
7. Adjusting and inspecting the hoses to ensure there are no kinks in the hoses and that the hoses are
not lying against any sharp edges.
8. Adjusting the door latch assembly to ensure the door fits flatly to the rack and that all gaskets seal to
the rack.
Note: For safety reasons, trained service personnel (or qualified professionals) must perform the installation
of the rear door heat exchanger.
Heat exchanger filling and draining overview
The following steps describes the requirements for draining and filling a heat exchanger.
1. Filling a heat exchanger with water includes using the air purge tool supplied with the heat exchanger
to purge any air from the heat exchanger manifolds.
Note: Attachment and detachment of air purge tool should be done with the tool valve open to reduce
water pressure at the air bleed valves and reduce water that might escape at the valves during
attaching or detaching.
Containers must be available for capturing water. The container must hold a minimum of 2 L (0.5 gal)
capacity for purging air and a minimum 6 L (1.6 gal) capacity for draining a heat exchanger.
44
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
2. Draining a heat exchanger is required before the door containing the heat exchanger can be removed
from the rack, or before a rack with a heat exchanger installed can be moved. The air purge tool can
be connected to the drain port on the bottom of the heat exchanger to drain the water.
3. Use absorbent materials, such as cloth, under the work area to capture any water that might spill
when filling or draining a heat exchanger.
Raised floor and non-raised floor environments
Planning for installation of your rear door heat exchangers is dependent on whether your data center has a
raised floor or a non-raised floor.
The following topics describe the requirements for raised floor and non-raised floor environments.
• Raised floor environment
• Non-raised floor environment
Planning for rear door heat exchangers in a raised floor environment
On a raised floor, hoses are routed under the floor tiles and are brought up from beneath the rack through
special tile cut outs. The hoses attach to the quick-connect couplings on the bottom of the heat exchanger.
Note: In the following examples, figures show optimal placement and size of openings for hose exit. In some
products, installation planning documents recommend other hole locations (for example, heavy racks may not
have openings allowed in tiles that casters are resting on). Specific product requirements should be followed
over those provided in this topic. Recommendations for openings in reinforced pedestal or stringer type tiles
versus non-reinforced pedestal tiles should also be followed. Existing tile cutouts for electrical or other cables
can be used (or expanded) for the hoses, if enough opening space is available to allow easy movement of
both hoses when the door is opened and closed. In general, hoses should exit the tiles at locations that will
not put high forces on the hoses, or cause rubbing that will abrade the hose surface and lead to premature
hose failure (leaks).
Raised floor hose requirements and management
In a typical example, each heat exchanger requires a special cut 0.6 m by 0.6 m (2 ft. by 2 ft.) floor tile below it
and in front of the rack. A portion of the tile is cut away and correctly covered to protect against sharp edges.
The corner opening is placed directly under the hinge side of the rack rear door. The opening size of the cut is
152.4 mm wide and 190.5 mm long +/- 12.7 mm (6.0 in. wide and 7.5 in. long +/- 0.5 in.) in the direction
parallel to the door. The following figures provide examples of hose management methods.
Figure 1. Raised floor hose management example 1; tile cut out size and position for 19-inch EIA-rail racks.
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
45
Planning
Figure 2. Raised floor hose management example 1; tile cut out size and position for 24-inch EIA-rail racks.
Figure 3. Raised floor hose management example 1; Tile cut out definition and location for 19-inch EIA-rail
racks
Figure 4. Raised floor hose management example 1; Tile cut out definition and location for 24-inch EIA-rail
racks
46
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
In another example, for racks being installed at the same time a heat exchanger is being installed, and in
cases where installation planning allows floor tile cutouts under the rack, each heat exchanger still requires a
special cut 0.6 m by 0.6 m (2 ft. by 2 ft.) floor tile. However, the floor tile will be positioned completely within
the footprint of the rack. A modified cable opening or independent hose cut out is used. Flexible hoses that
contain a right-angle elbow are used to route the hoses under the rack in a large loop to allow hose movement
when the door is opened and closed. The following figures show how to route hoses under the rack with
enough hose length to allow the hose to move freely as the door is opened and closed.
Figure 5. Raised floor and non-raised floor hose management example 2; loop under the 19-inch EIA-rail rack
with door closed
Figure 6. Raised floor and non-raised floor hose management example 2; loop under the 24-inch EIA-rail rack
with door closed
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
47
Planning
Figure 7. Raised floor and non-raised floor hose management example 2; loop under the 19-inch EIA-rail rack
with door open
Figure 8. Raised floor and non-raised floor hose management example 2; loop under the 24-inch EIA-rail rack
with door open
Lay hoses side-by-side as they run between the heat exchanger and the supply and return manifolds, and
allow the hoses to freely move. Leave enough slack in the hoses below the rear door so that minimum forces
are exerted on the door when the hoses are attached and operating. When routing hoses, avoid sharp bends
that cause hose kinks, and avoid hose contact with sharp edges.
Planning for rear door heat exchangers in a non-raised floor
environment
In data centers without a raised floor, straight hose assemblies cannot make the sharp bend to exit between
the floor and the rack door without kinking the hose.
Non-raised floor hose requirements and management
Hose assemblies with right-angle metal elbows are needed. This allows the hoses to be routed along the
floor, make the 90 degree turn upwards within the gap between the bottom of the heat exchanger door and
the floor surface, and then connect to the heat exchanger couplings. This is shown in the following figures.
48
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
Figure 1. Non-raised floor hose requirements for 19-inch EIA-rail rack
Figure 2. Non-raised floor hose requirements 24-inch EIA-rail rack
Hoses exiting the heat exchanger can be routed in a manner similar to that of power cables in a non-raised
floor data center. For example, place the hoses side-by-side and allow them to move freely as they approach
the rack (within approximately 3 m (10 ft.) of the rack). When the door is opened, it is acceptable for the hoses
to move slightly and rotate in parallel at the coupling interface inside the door. As the door is closed, the hoses
rotate back to their original positions.
Note: When opening or closing the door, some manipulation of the hose along the floor might be necessary to
prevent unwanted forces on the door and to make it easier to open and close the door.
Another method for non-raised floor hose routing is described using Figures 10 and 11 (without the hoses
exiting a tile cutout). Hose exiting the heat exchanger turns and loops under the rack. In that method, the hose
can then exit from under the rack at any place and in any direction that is convenient in your data center.
In either of these examples, hose coverings or protective devices are not provided by the seller. Routing and
protection of the hose assemblies exterior to the rack is your responsibility.
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
49
Planning
Suggested sources for secondary loop components
This topic provides lists of suggested suppliers that can provide cooling distribution solutions, and sources for
either flexible hose assemblies, or for providing water treatment that meets the suggested water quality
requirements.
• Cooling distribution unit suppliers
• Flexible hose suppliers
• Water treatment suppliers
Cooling distribution unit suppliers
The following table provides a list of possible suppliers for cooling distribution units.
Table 1. Suggested sources of cooling distribution units
North America
Vendor
Unit capacity
Contact information
Lytron Corporation
Coolant distribution unit 100 kW nominal capacity
www.lytron.com Lytron Corporation Sales (U.S.)
(781) 933-7300
North America, Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific
Liebert Corporation
Coolant distribution unit 100 kW nominal capacity
www.liebert.com
Select Contacts and search for a local office and
telephone number.
Affinity, Lydall Industrial
Thermal Solutions Inc
Coolant distribution units
• 60 kW nominal
capacity
• 100 kW nominal
capacity
• 120 kW nominal
capacity
• 300 kW nominal
capacity
Knurr Inc
www.affinitychillers.com
email: [email protected]
(603) 539-1420
Coolant distribution unit - 75 www.knurr.com
Kw nominal capacity
U.S. (514) 865-9454
Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific
Knurr Inc
Coolant distribution unit - 75 www.knurr.com
kW nominal capacity
+49 619-291-0455
Eaton-Williams Group, Ltd.
Coolant distribution unit 100 kW nominal capacity
www.eation-williams.com
+44 (0)1732 866055
Flexible hose suppliers
The following table provides a possible source of flexible hose assemblies that are fabricated from approved
materials. These assemblies have the required quick-connect couplings and are offered in various lengths,
50
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
Planning
providing choices in the type of hook-up and routing of hoses in your secondary loops.
Table 1. Suggested source for flexible hose supplier
North America, Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific
Dff
Corporation
Flexible hose assemblies with required quick-connect couplings.
Available in these lengths.
59 Abrams Drive
Agawam, MA
U.S., 01001
(413) 786-8880
• 3 m (10 ft.)
• 6 m (20 ft.)
• 9 m (30 ft.)
• 12 m (40 ft.)
• 15 m (50 ft.)
www.dffcorp.com
Hoses can be straight for raised floor applications, or hoses can use a
90 degree elbow at one end for either non-raised floor applications or
raised floor applications.
Water treatment supplier
The following table provides a list of possible water treatment suppliers.
Table 1. Suggested source of water treatment supplier
North America, Europe, Middle East, Africa, Asia Pacific
Nalco Company
www.nalco.com
Chemical kits are available for treating the water in secondary cooling loops.
North America: U.S.
1601 W. Diehl Road
Naperville, Illinois
60563-1198
Treatment can typically consist of anti-corrosion coatings and biocides. Obtain
details for the contents of these chemical kits from the supplier.
North America: Latin
America
Av. Das Nocoes Unidas
17.891
6 Andar 04795-100
Sao Paulo, SP Brazil
Europe:
Ir.G.Tjalmaweg 1
2342 BV Oegstgeest
The Netherlands
Asia Pacific:
2 International Business
Park
#02-20 The Strategy
Tower 2
Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers
51
Planning
Singapore 609930
Wordwide contact:
U.S. (480) 213-8915
Planning for communications
Your installation will probably require a variety of communication equipment to support the computer
installation. Telephone lines, fax lines, and the remote support facility (RSF) are just some of the types of
communications that you will need to have installed. You will have to refer to specific product planning
documentation for each type of communication equipment that you are going to install. The main tasks to
prepare for communication equipment are:
1. Get an exact list of the communication features that your company ordered:
a. First, make copies of the communication-feature planning list.
b. Next, find out the specific communication features on order from your company's copy of the
purchase agreement.
c. Finally, check the types of communication features and enter the quantities of feature cards
and cables on the communication-feature planning list. This list is your record of
communication features to help in your planning and coordinating tasks.
2. Prepare a communication-feature planning list:
♦ Use a separate planning list for each communication feature. On the list, connect the device
and modem blocks with lines to indicate the feature's arrangement in the network. Indicate
whether the network is switched or nonswitched. The network-diagram part of the list is for
typical networks. If enough space is not available on the planning list, use additional lists or
separate sheets of paper to draw the network.
♦ Finally, check or fill in the remaining part of the communication-feature planning list. You
might not be able to answer some items, such as the modem model, until you meet with the
local communication company representative.
3. Meet with the local communication company representative to order needed equipment and to
discuss service:
♦ Define the equipment and wiring to be provided by the communication company.
♦ Determine the power outlets needed for communication company equipment.
♦ Place an order for the needed services.
♦ Schedule the installation work the communication company will do before the arrival of your
server.
♦ Install a telephone for the service representative, if recommended.
♦ Define the options when you order a handset with a switched line.
4. Meet with the modem vendor to discuss the following items:
♦ Options such as switched or leased line, line speed, auto answer, and clocking must be
known.
♦ Who will install and who will service the original equipment manufacturer's (OEM) modem.
♦ What modems will require couplers, jacks, and plugs.
♦ Match the coupler and the modem.
♦ The telephone company must be notified of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
registration number and ringer equivalence number.
♦ Modems that require power outlets.
5. Coordinate the installation of your equipment with remote locations to be sure the proper equipment is
installed on time at both locations. Be sure the equipment at your location is compatible with the
equipment at the remote location. Pay particular attention to these items:
♦ The communicating devices must use the same type of communication features.
♦ The devices must operate at the same speed (bits per second).
♦ The modems must be compatible.
♦ The couplers must match the modem.
♦ The modem strapping (jumpers) must be the same at both ends of the line.
♦ Properly coordinating remote locations can prevent problems such as mismatched
communication equipment. A copy of the completed communication feature planning list
should be sent to the remote locations before the equipment is installed.
6. Determine and establish wiring practices for privately owned lines:
♦ Do not route your communication lines parallel with power lines. Power transients can cause
electrical noise in your communication lines. Noise can also be caused by electric motors,
52
Planning for communications
Planning
radios, and radar equipment.
♦ Use shielded outdoor-type cable where communication lines exit a building.
♦ Install shunt-type lightning protection on all exterior communication lines, whether they are
buried or overhead.
♦ Ground the shields of overhead communication lines where cables enter or exit junction
boxes or at other points where the shield is broken. For buried lines, ground the shield at
each building exit or entry.
♦ Shield continuity must not be broken where the ground conductor connects to the shield.
Cable that includes a drain conductor is easier to install when multiple grounding is needed.
See the applicable national and local safety standards for communication regulations and requirements.
Server specifications
This topic provides the detailed physical and operational specifications for your server. This information can
help you with the physical planning for the products you have ordered.
Click the appropriate models to view the specifications.
• Model ESCALA PL 245T/R
• Model 471/85
• Model ESCALA PL 250R-L
• Model ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+
• Model 112/85
• Model ESCALA PL 250T/R
• Model ESCALA PL 450T/R
• Model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• Model ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
• Model 185/75
• Model ESCALA PL 3250R
• Model ESCALA PL 6450R
• Model ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• Model ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• Model 7/10
• Model 7/20
• 14T/00 rack
• 14T/42 and 0553 racks
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstation
specifications
Server specifications provide detailed information for your server or workstation, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed
information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
Table 1. Server or workstation specifications
Server or workstation specifications
Server specifications
53
Planning
Plan views
Rear view with connectors
ASHRAE declarations
Rack-mounted ESCALA PL 245T/R server
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
429 mm
524 mm
218 mm
English
16.9 in.
20.6 in.
8.6 in.
EIA units1 Weight
25 kg
5
55 lb.
Stand-alone ESCALA PL 245T/R server
Dimensions
Metric
Width
Depth
216 mm
496 mm (without rear
cover
257 mm (including
stabilizer foot)
8.5 in.
English
Height
Weight
469 mm
25 kg
18.5 in.
55 lb.
Depth
Height
Weight
640 mm (with acoustical
cover)
469 mm
25 kg
25.2 in. (with acoustical
cover)
18.5 in.
55 lb.
525 mm (with rear
cover8)
19.5 in. (without rear
cover)
10.1 in. (including stabilizer
foot)
20.7 in. (with rear cover8)
Stand-alone kstation
Dimensions
Width
216 mm
Metric
257 mm (including
stabilizer foot)
8.5 in.
English
10.1 in. (including stabilizer
foot)
Shipping
dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
625 mm
655 mm
485 mm
English
24.6 in.
25.8 in.
19.1 in.
67 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
625 mm
655 mm
599 mm
30 kg
English
24.6 in.
25.8 in.
23.5 in.
67 lb.
Shipping
dimensions
(China)
30 kg
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
Rated voltage and
0.474
frequency5
100 - 127/200 - 240 V ac at 50/60
plus or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)
1536 BTU/hr
Maximum power consumption
530 W (1-way ESCALA PL 245T/R
, 1-way 471/85, and 2-way 471/85)
750 W (2-way ESCALA PL 245T/R
)
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
90 A
Leakage current (maximum)
1.6 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 4, 5, 6, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25,
32, 57, 59, 62, 66, 69, 70, 73, 75,
76
54
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
Planning
Branch circuit breaker
20 A (maximum)
Power cord length
2.8 m (9 ft.) - except United States
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature2
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41
degrees to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 45 degrees C (41
degrees to 113 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Maximum dew
point
Operating
Nonoperating
28 degrees C (82.4 degrees F)
29 degrees C (84.2 degrees F)
Noncondensing
8 to 80%
humidity
8 to 80%
Maximum
altitude
3048 m (10 000 ft.)
3048 m (10 000 ft.)
Noise emissions3, 4, 6, 7
Product
description
Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWAd (B)
Declared A-weighted sound
pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idling
Operating
Idling
471/85 1-way
workstation with
two 10 000 rpm
hard disk drives,
2843 graphics
card and 2 GB
of memory
(workstations
have acoustical
front and rear
covers)
5.04
4.74
314
284
471/85 2-way
workstation with
two 10 000 rpm
hard disk drives,
2843 graphics
card and 4GB of
memory
(workstations
have acoustical
front and rear
covers)
5.14
4.94
334
314
ESCALA PL
245T/R 1-way
server tower
with three 10
000 rpm hard
disk drives,
2843 graphics
card and 2 GB
of memory and
optional
acoustical front
and rear covers
5.04
4.74
314
28
5.54
5.44
374
364
ESCALA PL
245T/R 2-way
server tower
with three 10
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
55
Planning
000 rpm hard
disk drives,
2843 graphics
card and 2 GB
of memory and
optional
acoustical front
and rear covers
ESCALA PL
245T/R 1-way
server tower or
rack-mounted
server with
three 10 000
rpm hard disk
drives and 4 GB
of memory
5.3 - 6.14
5.0 - 6.14
384
354
ESCALA PL
245T/R 2-way
server tower or
rack-mounted
server with
three 10 000
rpm hard disk
drives and 4 GB
of memory
5.7 - 6.14
5.6 - 6.14
424
414
Front
Back
Left or right
Top
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
N/A
N/A
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Service clearances
Clearances
Operating
Nonoperating
762 mm (30 in.)
Seismic considerations
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The
allowable operating range is 5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95 degrees F). See
Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
4. Estimated value
5. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If dual
power supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current
from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
6. When a tape drive is installed, using the acoustic cover feature will reduce the noise emissions when
the tape drive is in use.
7. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
8. An optional acoustical cover is available for the ESCALA PL 245T/R.
56
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
Planning
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Airflow
maximum
Airflow
at 35
Weight
nominal degrees C
(95
degrees F)
Typical Heat
Release
Description
watts
Overall system
dimensions
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum
configuration
300
42
71
83
141
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
Maximum
configuration
450
42
71
83
141
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
Typical configuration
375
42
71
83
141
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
See ESCALA PL
245T/R
ASHRAE Class
3
Minimum
configuration
1-way, 2.5 GHz processor, 2 GB memory, three hard disk drives, five PCI cards
Maximum
configuration
2-way, 2.5 GHz processor, 8 GB memory, three hard disk drives, six PCI cards
Typical configuration 2-way, 2.5 GHz processor, 4 GB memory, three hard disk drives, four PCI cards
Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Airflow figure for desk-side server
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
57
Planning
58
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
Planning
Plug and receptacle type 76
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Taiwan
Type 76 200 - 240 V 15A
Type 76 200-240 V 15A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6659 (A)
39M52541 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A)
6663 (B)
39M52521 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (B)
Systems and expansion units
(A) - ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87
, D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85,
ESCALA PL 1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+,
ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, , 5095,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the
Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALA
PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of your server specifications, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed
information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
Table 1. Server specifications
Server specifications
Plan views
Front and rear views with connectors
Rack-mounted drawer
Planning for model ESCALA PL 245T/R server and kstationspecifications
59
Planning
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
437 mm
691 mm
88.9 mm
English
17.20 in.
27.2 in.
3.5 in.
EIA units1
Weight
23 kg
2
51 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer
Shipping Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
635 mm
864 mm
457 mm
53 kg
English
25 in.
34 in.
18 in.
117 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
Shipping Dimensions
635 mm
864 mm
457 mm
53 kg
English
25 in.
34 in.
18 in.
117 lb.
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack
Optional power distribution unit (PDU), 0551 rack, 14T/00, 14T/42
and 0553 racks
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
0.500 ( ESCALA PL 250R-L 7/10)
0.658 (ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or
ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ with 4-way, 1.5
GHz processor configuration)
Rated voltage and frequency
100 - 127 or 200-240V ac at 50/60 plus
or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)
1622 Btu/hr ( ESCALA PL 250R-L 7/10)
2133 Btu/hr (ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or
ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ with 4-way, 1.5
GHz processor configuration)
Maximum power consumption
475 W ( ESCALA PL 250R-L 7/10)
625 W (ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or
ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ with 4-way, 1.5
GHz processor configuration)
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
75 A
Leakage current (maximum)
1.2 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 4, 5, 6, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25, 32, 59,
Nema 6-15, 62, 66, 69, 70, 73
Dual power feature code
7989 (quantity 2)
Branch circuit breaker
20 A (maximum)
Power cord length
2.8 m (9 ft.) - except United States
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature2
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees
to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 45 degrees C (41 degrees
to 113 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Operating
Nonoperating
Maximum dew point
28 degrees C (82 degrees
29 degrees C (84.2 degrees F)
F)
Noncondensing humidity
8 to 80%
60
8 to 80%
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALAPL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications
Planning
Maximum altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions3
LWAd (Category 2D, General business)
rack drawer
Operating
Idle
6.2 bels4
6.2 bels4
44 dB4
44 dB4
LpAm (1-meter bystander)
Service clearances
Clearances
Front
Back
Left or right
Operating
762 mm (30 762 mm (30
Not applicable
in.)
in.)
Nonoperating
762 mm (30 762 mm (30
in.)
in.)
762 mm (30
in.)
Top
Not applicable
762 mm (30 in.)
Seismic considerations
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553 or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The
allowable operating range is 5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95 degrees F). See
Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
4. Preliminary data.
0551 rack
This topic provides the detailed specifications for the 0551 rack. For information on installing the racks, see
Installing the 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0551, and 0553 racks. For information on installing additional rack
features, such as rack doors, heat exchanger doors, security kits, earthquake kits, multiple rack attachment
kits, status beacons, and latch brackets, see Installing rack features.
Specifications for the 0551 rack
Pictured is the 0551
rack
The 0551 provides an
empty 1.8 m rack (36
EIA units of total
space). See the plug
types for specific
information on the
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALAPL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications
61
Planning
power distribution
units.
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
Dimensions
650 mm
1020 mm
1800 mm
English
25.5 in.
40.0 in.
71.0 in.
Maximum configuration The weight of the empty rack is 244 kg (535 lb.). Click the
weight
appropriate link to see the weight for what is installed. , ,
9406-570 and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,, 7884
Electrical
Click the appropriate link to see the electrical characteristics for what is installed. , ,
9406-570 and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,, , 7884
Plug types and power
distribution unit.
Power distribution unit (PDU) option. , , 9406-570 and ESCALA
PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,, 7884
High Speed Link (HSL) cable requirements
Temperature requirements
Operating
10 degrees to 38 degrees C (50 degrees to 100.4 degrees)
Nonoperating
1 degrees to 60 degrees C (33.8 degrees to 140 degrees F)
Environment
requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
Noncondensing
humidity
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Wet bulb temperature
22.8 degrees C (73 degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6 degrees F)
Maximum altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions4
Rack noise levels are a function of the number and type of
drawers installed. See server or hardware specifications for
specific requirements
Service clearances
Front
Back
Sides2
Top2
762 mm
762 mm
762 mm
762 mm
30 in.
30 in.
30 in.
30 in.
Notes:
1. The 1.8 meter rack has 10 EIA units of space remaining. This space will be filled
with a 5 EIA filler panel, a 3 EIA filler panel, and two of the 1 EIA filler panels.
Because the rack does not have power distribution, the model 830 requires a
power cord of sufficient length to reach the receptacle. The power cord for model
830 must be used to determine the appropriate receptacle.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. Acoustic doors are available for the racks. Feature code 6248 is available for the
0551 and 14T/00 racks. Feature code 6249 is available for the 0553 and 14T/42
racks. The overall sound reduction is approximately 6 dB. The doors add 381 mm
(15 in.) to the depth of the racks.
4. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
See 0551 or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551 or 7014 rack is populated with
various server models.
62
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALAPL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications
Planning
Caster and leveler locations
The following diagram provides the caster and leveler locations for the 14T/00, 14T/42, 0551, and 0553 racks.
Figure 1. Caster and leveler locations
Plug and receptacle type 73
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Type 73 250V 15A
Brazil
Cord Feature Part Number
1394 (D)
74P4393 and 39M52401 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A)
6495 (A) (C)
25R2584 and 39M52401 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A) (C)
6499 (D) (B)
25R2585 and 39M52411 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (B) (D)
Systems and expansion units
(A) - Model ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA
PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL
450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or
ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL 1650R-L+,
ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL
250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
(B) - 11D/10, 11D/11 expansion units, , 57/86, 57/87, D24, T24
(C) - 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
(D) - Model 11D/20, 5095
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-L, 7/10 (9123-710), and ESCALAPL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+ server specifications
63
Planning
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC
on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or
ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of the model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL
250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications, including dimensions, electrical, power,
temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed information, such
as compatible hardware and plug types.
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
Table 1. Specifications for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+
Specifications for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
5
Plan views
Top down view
Front and rear view with connectors
ASHRAE declarations
Rack-mounted drawer
Dimensions
EIA units1
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
437 mm
584 mm
178 mm
English
17.20 in.
23 in.
7 in.
Weight
43 kg
4
95 lb.
Desk-side server
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
533 mm
43 kg
21 in.
95 lb.
630 mm (without rear cover
Metric
201 mm
706 mm (with 6587 rear cover)
23 in. (without rear cover)
English
7.9 in.
27.8 in. (with 6587 rear cover)
Rack-mounted drawer
Shipping
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
630 mm
933 mm
584 mm
53 kg
English
24.80 in.
36.75 in.
23 in.
117 lb.
Depth
Height
Weight
Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Shipping
Dimensions
64
Width
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
Planning
Metric
679 mm
978 mm
610 mm
53 kg
English
26.75 in.
38.50 in.
24 in.
117 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
584 mm
880 mm
813 mm
50 kg
English
23 in.
34.65 in.
32 in.
110 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
616 mm
904 mm
832 mm
63 kg
English
24.25 in.
35.60 in.
32.75 in.
138 lb.
Desk-side server
Shipping
Dimensions
Desk-side server (China)
Shipping
Dimensions
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack
7884 (9406-520 and 9405-520)
Optional power distribution unit (PDU), 0551 rack, 14T/00, 14T/42
and 0553 racks
0229 (ESCALA PL 250T/R)
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
0.632
Rated voltage and
frequency6
100 - 127/200 - 240V ac at 50/60 plus
or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)
2046 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption
600 W
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
88 A
Leakage current (maximum)
1.2 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 4, 5, 6, 10, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25,
32, 34, 62, 64, 66, 69, 70, 75, 76
Dual power feature code
5158
Branch circuit breaker
20 A (maximum)
Power cord length
2.8 m (9 ft.) - except United States
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature2
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41
degrees to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 45 degrees C (41
degrees to 113 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Maximum dew
point
Operating4
Nonoperating
28 degrees C (82.4 degrees F)
29 degrees C (84.2 degrees F)
Noncondensing
8 to 80%
humidity
8 to 80%
Maximum
altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions3, 8, 9
Product
description
112/85
workstation
Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad
(B)
Declared A-weighted sound
pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
5.1
5.0
33
31
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
65
Planning
ESCALA PL
250T/R+ or
ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ,
ESCALA PL
250T/R, and
desk side server
with two power
supplies, eight
hard drives and
acoustic
package
5.7
5.6
40
39
ESCALA PL
250T/R+ or
ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ,
ESCALA PL
250T/R, and
desk side server
with two power
supplies and
eight hard
drives
6.1
5.9
44
41
ESCALA PL
250T/R
rack-mounted
server
6.0
5.8
43
41
Service clearances
Front
Back
Left or right
Top
Operating
Clearances
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
N/A
N/A
Nonoperating
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Seismic considerations
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The
allowable operating range is 5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95 degrees F). See
Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
4. All Model ESCALA PL 250T/R disk bays should be filled when the unit is shippedwith either disk
drives or slot fillers, but if a disk is removed, the seller recommends that disk drive slots be refilled
with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the disk drive slot will help ensure proper air
flow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance. Ordering feature 6598 results in four
additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
5. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range. If dual
power supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal current
from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
6. The model 112/858, is only available as a desk-side model.
7. When a tape drive is installed, using the acoustic cover feature will reduce the noise emissions
when the tape drive is in use.
8. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO
9296.
66
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
Planning
Special Hardware Management Console considerations
When the ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ servers are
connected to a Hardware Management Console, the console must be provided within the same room and
within 8 m (26 ft.) of the server. For additional considerations, see Planning for consoles, interfaces, and
terminals for your service environment.
Plan view for model 9406-520 and ESCALA PL 250T/R
Note: A flat, supportive surface is optimal for placement of the of the ESCALA PL 250T/R desk-side servers.
This allows the front cover to be properly supported.
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for the desk-side model ESCALA PL 250T/R.
Model ESCALA PL 250T/R plan view
The feature code 6587 is a decorative rear cover that has sound-deadening capability. This cover is for
servers that do not have external I/O attached to a high speed link (HSL) loop. The cover cannot be used if
HSL cables are attached to the server.
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ orESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
67
Planning
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat
Release2
Description
watts
Airflow
nominal1
Airflow
maximum1
at 35
Weight
degrees C
(95
degrees F)
Overall system
dimensions
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration 1
420
26
44
40
68
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
Configuration 2
450
26
44
40
68
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
Configuration 3
500
30
51
45
76
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
Configuration 4
485
30
51
45
76
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
Configuration 5
550
30
51
45
76
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
See ESCALA PL
250T/R
ASHRAE
Class
3
Configuration 1 1-way, 1.5 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, six PCI cards, tape, DVD
Configuration 2 1-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 3 2-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape,
DVD
Configuration 4 1-way, 1.9 GHz processor, 16 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, three PCI cards, tape, two
DVDs
Configuration 5 2-way, 1.9 GHz processor, 32GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, DVD
Note:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations do not include redundant power supply, feature
code 5158.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
♦ 100-127/200-240 Vac
♦ 10/5 A | 1.0 kVa
♦ 50/60 Hz | 1-phase
68
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250T/R, 112/85, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ orESCALA PL 450T/R-L+ server specifications
Planning
Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Airflow figure for desk-side server
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or
ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of the model ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 450T/R+
or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications, including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature,
environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed information, such as compatible
hardware and plug types.
Model ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
Note: The following specifications are approximate and do not represent measured data. They are provided
for informational purposes only.
Specifications for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, 7/20 , and ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Plan views
Top down view
Front and rear views with connectors
ASHRAE declarations
Rack-mounted drawer
Dimensions
EIA Units3
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
437 mm
731 mm
178 mm
English
17.2 in.
28.8 in.
7.0 in.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
201 mm
779 mm
533 mm
62 kg
English
7.9 in.
30.7 in.
21.0 in.
137 lb.
44.7 kg
4
98.5 lb.
Desk-side server
Dimensions
Rack-mounted drawer
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
69
Planning
Shipping
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
648 mm
991 mm
704 mm
80 kg
English
25.5 in.
39 in.
27.7 in.
175 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
640 mm
965 mm
692 mm
80 kg
English
25.2 in.
38 in.
27.25 in.
1.75 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
648 mm
991 mm
704 mm
80 kg
English
25.5 in.
39 in.
27.7 in.
175 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
640 mm
965 mm
692 mm
80 kg
English
25.2 in.
38 in.
27.25 in.
175 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Shipping
Dimensions
Desk-side server4
Shipping
Dimensions
Desk-side server (China)4
Shipping
Dimensions
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack
0230 (ESCALA PL 450T/R)
Power distribution Unit (PDU), 0551, 14T/00 , 14T/42 and 0553 racks
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
1.158
Rated voltage, rated amps, and 135/507/20
frequency6
1-2 way
100-127 V ac (12 A) to 200-240 V ac
(10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or minus 0.5
Hz
1-4 way and 3-4 way
200-240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus
or minus 0.5 Hz
ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 1-2 way
850T/R-L+
100-127 V ac (12 A) to 200-240 V ac
(10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or minus 0.5
Hz
1-8 way and 3-8 way
200-240 V ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus
or minus 0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)
3754 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption
1100 W
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
85 A
Leakage current (maximum)
1.5 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 4, 5, 6, 10, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25,
32, 34, 59, 62, 64, 66, 69, 70, 73
Dual power feature code
Included
Branch circuit breaker
20 A (maximum)
Power cord length
2.8 m (9 ft.) - except United States
70
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
Planning
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature2
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41
degrees to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 45 degrees C (41
degrees to 113 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to degrees 140 F)
Maximum dew
point
Operating5
Nonoperating
28 degrees C (82.4 degrees F)
29 degrees C (84.2 degrees F)
Noncondensing
8 to 80%
humidity
8 to 80%
Maximum
altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions1, 10
Product
description
Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B)
Declared A-weighted sound
pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
Desk-side
models:
ESCALA PL
450T/R, 7/20
with two hard
drives and
non-redundant
power
6.0
5.9
42
41
Rack-mounted
models:
ESCALA PL
450T/R, 7/20
with two hard
drives and
non-redundant
power
6.1
6.0
44
43
Rack-mounted
models:
ESCALA PL
450T/R, 7/20
with eight hard
drives and
redundant
power
6.3
6.2
45
45
Rack-mounted
model: ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or
ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+ with
eight hard
drives and
redundant
power
6.89
6.69
Service clearances
Clearances
Front
Back
Left/right
Top
Operating
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
N/A
N/A
Nonoperating
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Seismic considerations
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
71
Planning
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The
allowable operating range is 5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95 degrees F). See
Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3. See 0551, 0553, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
4. Desk-side server is shipped on its side
5. All Model ESCALA PL 450T/R disk bays should be filled when the unit is shippedwith either disk
drives or slot fillers, but if a disk is removed, the seller recommends that disk drive slots be refilled
with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the disk drive slot will help ensure proper air
flow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance. Ordering feature 6598 results in four
additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
6. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range for a
defined processor configuration. If dual power supplies are installed and operating, the power
supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal
current to the load.
7. Configured with two disk drives and non-redundant power system.
8. Configured with eight disk drives and redundant power system.
9. Estimated value.
10. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
Special Hardware Management Console considerations
When the ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ servers are connected to a
Hardware Management Console, the console must be provided within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft.)
of the server. For additional considerations, see Planning for consoles, interfaces, and terminals for your
service environment.
Plan view for model ESCALA PL 450T/R
Note: A flat, supportive surface is optimal for placement of the ESCALA PL 450T/R desk-side servers. This
allows the front cover to be properly supported.
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for the desk-side model ESCALA PL 450T/R.
72
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ orESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
Planning
Model ESCALA PL 450T/R plan view
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Typical
Heat
Release2
Description
watts
Airflow
maximum1
Airflow
at 35
Weight
nominal1 degrees C
(95
degrees F)
Overall system dimensions
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration
1
500
28
48
45
76
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Configuration
2
575
32
60
50
85
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Configuration
3
800
32
60
50
85
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Configuration
4
650
32
60
50
85
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Configuration
5
865
32
60
50
85
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
Configuration
6
925
32
60
50
85
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
See ESCALA PL 450T/R,
7/20, and ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL
850T/R-L+
ASHRAE
Class
3
1-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, DVD
Planning for model ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ orESCALA PL 850T/R-L+ server specifications
73
Planning
Configuration
1
Configuration 2-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards, tape, DVD
2
Configuration 4-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, four PCI cards, tape, DVD
3
Configuration 2-way, 1.9 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, DVD
4
Configuration 4-way, 1.9 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, DVD
5
Configuration 8-way, 1.5 GHz processor, 4 GB memory, eight hard disk drives, five PCI cards, tape, 2 DVDs
6
Note:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
♦ 100-127/200-240 Vac
♦ 10/10 A | 1.0/2.0 kVa
♦ 50/60 Hz | 1-phase
Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Airflow figure for desk-side server
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of your server specifications, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed
information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
74
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS server specifications
Planning
Server specifications
Plan views
Rear view with connectors
Rack-mounted drawer
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
440 mm
710 mm
43 mm
English
17.3 in.
28.0 in.
1.7 in.
EIA Units3 Weight
17 kg
1
37 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer
Shipping
dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
635 mm
851 mm
330 mm
20 kg
English
25.0 in.
33.5 in.
13.0 in.
43 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
610 mm
1016 mm
445 mm
27 kg
English
24.0 in.
40 in.
17.5 in.
60 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Shipping
dimensions
Feature code for drawer mounted in rack
0259
Power distribution Unit (PDU), 0551, 14T/00 , 14T/42 and 0553 racks
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
0.421
Rated voltage, rated amps, and ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 100-127 V ac (12 A) to 200-240 V
frequency4
450R-XS
ac (10 A) at 50 to 60 plus or minus
0.5 Hz
Thermal output (maximum)
1365 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption
400 W
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
75 A
Leakage current (maximum)
1.2 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 4, 5, 6, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25, 32,
57, 59, 62 , 66, 69, 70, 73, 75, 76
Dual power feature code
7958 (quantity 2)
Branch circuit breaker
20 A (maximum)
Power cord length
2.8 m (9 ft.) - except United States
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature2
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41
degrees to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 45 degrees C (41
degrees to 113 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to degrees 140 F)
Maximum dew
point
Operating
Nonoperating
28 degrees C (82.4 degrees F)
29 degrees C (84.2 degrees F)
Noncondensing
8 to 80%
humidity
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS server specifications
8 to 80%
75
Planning
Maximum
altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions1, 5
Product
description
Declared A-weighted sound power level, LWad (B)
Declared A-weighted sound
pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
ESCALA PL
250R-VL or
ESCALA PL
450R-XS with
two hard drives
and two power
supplies
6.8
6.8
52
52
ESCALA PL
250R-VL or
ESCALA PL
450R-XS with
acoustic door
(feature code
6248 or 6249)
with two hard
drives and two
power supplies
6.2
6.2
44
44
Service clearances
Clearances
Front
Back
Left/right
Top
Operating
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
N/A
N/A
Nonoperating
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30
in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Seismic considerations
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950 00; EN 60950; IEC 60950 including all National Differences
Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Class 3 product as defined in ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments. The
allowable operating range is 5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95 degrees F). See
Temperature and humidity design criteria topic for more information.
3. See 0551, 0553, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or 7014
rack is populated with various server models.
4. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published rated voltage range for a
defined processor configuration. If dual power supplies are installed and operating, the power
supplies draw approximately equal current from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal
current to the load.
5. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
76
Planning for model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS server specifications
Planning
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
1650R-L+ server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of your server specifications, including dimensions, electrical,
power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed
information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
Use the following specifications to plan for your server.
Table 1. Server specifications
Server specifications
Plan views
Top down view
Front and rear views with connectors
ASHRAE declarations
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
483 mm
790 mm
174.1 mm
English
19 in.
31.1 in.
6.85 in.
EIA units1
Weight
63.6 kg
4
140 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer
Shipping
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
648 mm
991 mm
704 mm
80 kg
English
25.5 in.
39 in.
27.7 in.
175 lb.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Metric
640 mm
965 mm
692 mm
80 kg
English
25.2 in.
38 in.
27.25 in.
1.75 lb.
Rack-mounted drawer (China)
Shipping
Dimensions
Drawer mounted in 0551 rack, 14T/00 , 14T/42 and 0553 0231 (ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,
racks, Power distribution unit (PDU)
4-way),
0232 (ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,
8-way),
0241 (ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,
12-way),
0242 (ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,
16-way)
0260 (ESCALA PL 1650R-L+, 8-way)
0261 (ESCALA PL 1650R-L+, 16-way)
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
Rated voltage and
Thermal output
1.368
frequency6
(maximum)9
200-240V ac at 50/60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
4437 Btu/hr
Maximum power consumption4, 7
1300 W
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current (maximum)
88 A
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ server specifications
77
Planning
Leakage current (maximum)
3 mA
Phase
1
Compatible plug types
2, 5, 6, 10, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 25, 32, 34, 62,
64, 66, 69
Dual power feature code
Included
Branch circuit breaker
20 A maximum
Power cord length
2.7 m (9 ft.) Europe; 1.8 m (6 ft.) U.S.; 1.8 m
(6 ft.) and 4.3 m (14 ft.) for U.S. cords with
plug type 5
Environment requirements
Recommended operating temperature
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 degrees to 95
degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
5 degrees to 40 degrees C (41 degrees to
104 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40 degrees to
140 degrees F)
Wet bulb
temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
23 degrees C (73.4 degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6 degrees F)
Noncondensing
8 to 80%
humidity
8 to 80% (5 to 100%
Maximum
altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
3048 m (10000 ft.)
shipping)
Noise emissions2, 8
Product
description
Declared A-weighted sound power
level, LWad (B)
Declared A-weighted sound pressure
level, LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
ESCALA PL
850R/PL
1650R/R+, and
ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, 1.65
GHz, 4-way
configuration
with four hard
drives and two
power supplies
6.8
6.8
51
51
ESCALA PL
850R/PL
1650R/R+, and
ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, 1.65
GHz, 4-way
configuration
with four hard
drives and two
power supplies
and acoustic
doors (feature
code 6248 or
6249)
6.23
6.23
463
463
7.13
7.13
533
533
ESCALA PL
850R/PL
1650R/R+, and
ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, 1.9
GHz, 4-way
configuration
with four hard
78
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ server specifications
Planning
drives and two
power supplies
ESCALA PL
850R/PL
1650R/R+, and
ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, 1.9
GHz, 4-way
configuration
with four hard
drives and two
power supplies
and acoustic
doors (feature
code 6248 or
6249)
6.53
6.53
473
473
Front
Back
Left or right
Top
Operating
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
N/A
N/A
Nonoperating
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
762 mm (30 in.)
Service clearances
Clearances
Seismic considerations:
Data communications:
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: FCC Part 15, ICES-003
Safety compliance: IEC 60950; UL 60950; CSA 60950
Note:
1. See 0551, 0553, or 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations when the 0551, 0553, or
7014 rack is populated with various server models.
2. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
3. Estimated value
4. Maximum power consumption is specified for each ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ 4-way
drawer. The 8-way, 12-way, and 16-way configurations are based on the use of multiple 4-way
drawers (for example, an 8-way configuration consists of two 4-way drawers, a 12-way
configuration consists of three 4-way drawers, and a 16-way configuration consists of four
4-way drawers).
5. All Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ disk bays should be filled when the unit is
shippedwith either disk drives or slot fillers, but if a disk is removed, the seller recommends that
disk drive slots be refilled with either another disk drive or a disk slot filler. Filling the disk drive
slot will help ensure proper air flow for cooling and help maintain optimal EMI compliance.
Ordering feature 6598 results in four additional disk slot fillers being shipped.
6. The power supplies automatically accept any voltage with the published, rated-voltage range. If
dual power supplies are installed and operating, the power supplies draw approximately equal
current from the utility (mains) and provide approximately equal current to the load.
7. Maximum power consumption is specified for each ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ 8-way drawer. The
8-way and 16-way configurations are based on the use of multiple 8-way drawers (for example,
a 16-way configuration consists of two 8-way drawers).
8. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO
9296.
9. Thermal output value is for each 4-way drawer configuration.
Special Hardware Management Console considerations
When the server is connected to a Hardware Management Console, the console must be provided within the
same room and within 8 m (26 ft.) of the server. For additional considerations, see Planning for consoles,
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL1650R-L+ server specifications
79
Planning
interfaces, and terminals for your service environment.
Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment
DANGERHeavy equipment
mishandled. (D006)
personal injury or equipment damage might result if
You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning information
provided, with assistance from an authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery,
prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the
equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the
time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the
transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The
authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as
needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers
when you relocate or dispose of equipment.
Plan view for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
1650R-L+
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for the model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+,
and ESCALA PL 1650R-L+.
Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ plan view (rack-mount)
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement-reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
80
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL1650R-L+ server specifications
Planning
Typical Heat Airflow
Release2 nominal1
Description
watts
Airflow
maximum1
at 35
degrees C
(95
degrees F)
Weight
Overall system dimensions
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Configuration
1
750
90 153 140
238
See ESCALA PL 850R/PL See ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, and ESCALA 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
PL 1650R-L+
1650R-L+
Configuration
2
950
90 153 140
238
See ESCALA PL 850R/PL See ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, and ESCALA 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
PL 1650R-L+
1650R-L+
Configuration
3
910
90 153 140
238
See ESCALA PL 850R/PL See ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, and ESCALA 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
PL 1650R-L+
1650R-L+
Configuration
4
1000
90 153 140
238
See ESCALA PL 850R/PL See ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, and ESCALA 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL
PL 1650R-L+
1650R-L+
ASHRAE
Class
3
Configuration 4-way, 1.65 GHz processor, 48 GB memory, six hard disk drives, six PCI cards, DVD
1
Configuration 4-way, 1.9 GHz processor, 12 GB memory, six hard disk drives, five PCI cards, two DVDs
2
Configuration 8-way, 1.5 GHz processor, 4 GB memory, six hard disk drives, two PCI cards, DVD
3
Configuration 4-way, 2.2 GHz processor, 32 GB memory, six hard disk drives, four PCI cards, DVD
4
Note:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations.
2. The product safety rating label contains the following information:
♦ 200-240 Vac
♦ 10 A | 2.0 kVa
♦ 50/60 Hz | 1-phase
Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Plug and receptacle type 69
Planning for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, and ESCALA PL1650R-L+ server specifications
81
Planning
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
International Electrotechnical
Commission
Type 69 200-240 V 10 A
IS6538
India
Cord Feature
Part Number
6494 (A) (when ordered with server) 74P4424 and 39M52261 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A)
74P4422 and 39M52241 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)(B)
6451 (B)
Systems and expansion units
(A) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of the model 185/75 server specifications, including
dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to
more detailed information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
The model 185/75 refers to the complete system. The system consists of multiple components, as
summarized in the following table.
Table 1. Model 185/75 components
Model
Minimum per system
Maximum
per system
42 EIA unit, 24-inch rack (54-inch deep)
1
1
FC7945
Slimline door set for FC5793 rack (front and
rear)
11
11
FC7947
Acoustic door set for FC5793 rack (front and
rear)
11
11
FC5793
Description
185/75 (FC7836)3
8-way, 1.9 GHz processor
1
12
185/75 (FC7657)3
16-way, 1.5 GHz processor
1
12
185/75 (FC7675)3
8-way, 2.2 GHz processor
1
12
1
12
185/75
(FC7676)3
16-way, 1.9 GHz processor
Various
Hardware Management Console
7045-SW4
HPS switch
82
(HMC)2
1
2
0
2
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
FC57/91 and FC57/94 I/O drawer
0
5
FC6200 or FC6201
0
6
Optional integrated battery backup
Note:
1. Either slimline doors or acoustical doors are selected during the order process. Slimline doors do not
meet the acoustic limits for Category 1A or 1B.
2. For the model 185/75, a Hardware Management Console must be provided within the same room
and within 8 m (26 ft.) of the server.
3. The maximum number of processors per system is the total number of FC7836, FC7657, FC7675,
and FC7676 that can be combined to a maximum of 12.
Table 2. Specifications for model 185/75
Specifications for model 185/75
Plan views
Top down view
Rear view with connectors
ASHRAE declarations (heat load data for various configurations)
Dimensions and weight1
Slimline doors2
Acoustical doors2
Height
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
Width
785 mm (30.9 in.)
785 mm (30.9 in.)
Depth
1529 mm (60.2 in.)
1885 mm (74.2 in.)
Physical
Characteristic
Weight - maximum configuration (with 1.9 GHz processor)
With integrated battery
backup and slimline
doors
Single frame
1569 kg (3460 lb.)
Without integrated battery
With integrated battery
Without
backup with slimline doors backup and with acoustical integrated
doors
battery
backup
and with
acoustical
doors
1439 kg (3173 lb.)
1578 kg (3479 lb.)
1448 kg
(3192 lb.)
Shipping dimensions and weight
Height
2311 mm (91 in.)
Width
940 mm (37 in.)
Depth
1613 mm (63.5 in.)
Weight
Varies by configuration
Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase)
Rated voltage and frequency (3 phase)
200 to 240 V ac at 50 to 60 380 to 415 V ac at 50 to 60 480 V ac
Hz
Hz
at 50 to
60 Hz
Rated current, power cord with 48A plug,
FC 8688 or 8689 (amps per phase)
48
--
--
Rated current, all other power cords
(amps, per phase)
60
32
24
0.97
0.93
Maximum power
Power factor, typical
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
41.6 kW
0.99
83
Planning
Inrush current (maximum)3
163 A
Thermal output
142 kBtu/hr
142
kBtu/hr
142 kBtu/hr
Dual power feature code
Standard7
Branch circuit breaker and cord information
See Breaker rating and cord
information
Power cord length
4.2 m (14 ft.) - all locations (except
Chicago)
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States (Chicago)
Environment specifications (based on an altitude of 1295 m (4250 ft.)
Recommended operating temperature8
10 degrees to 32 degrees C (50
degrees to 89.6 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature
10 degrees to 43 degrees C (50
degrees to 109.4 degrees F)
Storage temperature
1 degree to 60 degrees C (33.8
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Shipping temperature
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Maximum wet
bulb
Noncondensing
relative
humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
Storage4
Shipping4
23 degrees C (73.4
degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6
degrees F)
29 degrees C (84.2
degrees F)
29
degrees
C (84.2
degrees
F)
8 to 80 %
8 to 80 %
5 to 80 %
5 to 100
%
Maximum
altitude
Declared acoustical noise emissions7
Product
configuration
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, LWAd
(Bels)5, 6
Declared A-Weighted Sound
Pressure Level, LpAM (dB)5, 6
(bystander, 1 m)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
Small
configuration:
Two
processors,
bulk power,
and one I/O
drawer;
nominal
conditions,
slimline door
set
8.2
8.2
65
65
Small
configuration:
Two
processors,
bulk power,
and one I/O
drawer;
nominal
conditions,
acoustical door
set
7.6
7.6
59
59
8.67
8.67
69
69
Typical
configuration:
84
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
six processors,
bulk power,
and one I/O
drawer;
nominal
conditions,
slimline door
set
Typical
configuration:
six processors,
bulk power,
and one I/O
drawer;
nominal
conditions,
acoustical door
set
8.0
8.0
63
63
Maximum
configuration:
12 processors,
bulk power,
and two I/O
drawers;
nominal
conditions,
slimline door
set
8.97
8.97
717
717
Maximum
configuration:
12 processors,
bulk power,
and two I/O
drawers;
nominal
conditions,
acoustical door
set
8.2
8.2
65
65
Service clearances
For a graphical representation of service clearances, see Service clearances
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950-1;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences
Note:
1. For configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration
2. Doors are not installed during product shipment to the customer.
3. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No
inrush currents occur during the normal power off-on cycle.
4. When an approved vapor bag and desiccant packets are used to protect the system, the storage
specifications are valid for 6 months and the shipping specifications are valid for 1 month. Otherwise,
storage and shipping specifications are valid for two weeks each.
5. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure
measured at the 1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
6. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with 9296.
7. Attention: Your server installation may be subject to government regulations (such as those
prescribed by OSHA or European Community Directives that cover noise level exposure in the
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
85
Planning
workplace. The model 185/75 is available with an optional acoustical door feature that can reduce
the likelihood of exceeding noise level exposure limits for densely populated racks. The actual sound
pressure levels in your installation will depend on a variety of factors, including the number of racks
in the installation; the size, materials, and configuration of the room where the racks are installed; the
noise levels from other equipment; the room ambient temperature, and employees' location in
relation to the equipment. It is recommended that a qualified person, such as an industrial hygienist
or acoustical consultant, be consulted to determine whether the sound pressure levels to which
employees may be exposed exceed regulatory limits.
8. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 degree C (1.8 degrees F) per 219 m
(719 ft.) above 1295 m (4250 ft.). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft.).
To effectively plan for the model 185/75, you will need to view the following topics and incorporate them into
your server planning, as appropriate.
• Breaker rating and cord information
• Power cord features
• Doors and covers
• Plan views
• Raised-floor requirements and preparation
• Cut and place floor panels
• Secure the rack
• Position the rack
• Install the frame tie-down kit
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
• Considerations for multiple system installations
• Service clearances
• Total system power consumption
• Cooling requirements
• Moving the system to the installation site
• Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
• Balancing power panel loads
• Power cord configurations
• Dual power installation
• Approximate system weights by configuration
• Weight distribution
• Unit emergency power off
• Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
• Machine holdup times
Plan views
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.
Figure 1. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors
86
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Figure 2. Plan view for single frame systems with slimline doors
Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each caster
swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.
Figure 3. Leveling foot and frame dimensions
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
87
Planning
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat
Release
Airflow
nominal1
Airflow
maximum1
at 35
Weight
degrees C
(95 degrees
F)
Overall system
dimensions
Description
kW
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum
configuration
3.7
485
725 1232 See 185/75
See 185/75
Maximum
configuration
41.6
2960 3029 4300 7306 See 185/75
See 185/75
22.2
1610 2735 2350 3993 See 185/75
See 185/75
Typical configuration
824
ASHRAE Class
3
Minimum
configuration
One processor drawer
Maximum
configuration
12 processor drawers and two I/O drawers
Typical configuration
6 processor drawers and 2 I/O drawers
Figure 1. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Breaker rating and cord information
The following table illustrates the power cord options for the three-phase model 185/75 with their geographic,
breaker rating, and cord information.
88
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Table 1. Breaker rating and cord information
Three-phase supply voltage
(50/60 Hz)
200-240 V
380-415 V
480 V
Recommended
customer-circuit-breaker
rating1
60 A (60-A plug) or 80 A (100-A
plug)
40 A
30 A
1.8 m (6 ft.) and 4.3 m (14 ft.) 6
AWG power cord (60-A plug), or 1.8
m (6 ft.) and 4.3 m (14 ft.) 6 AWG
power cord (100-A Plug)
14 foot, 8 AWG
power cord,
(electrician
installed)
6 and 14 foot,
8AWG power
cord
IEC309, 60 A, type 460R9W (not
provided) or IEC309, 100 A, type
4100R9W (not provided)
Not specified,
electrician installed
IEC309, 30 A,
type 430R7W
(not provided)
Cord information
Recommended receptacle
Note:
1. The exact circuit breaker ratings may not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit
breaker ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. Always consult local electrical
codes.
2. When possible, use metal backbox with power cords using IEC-309 plugs.
Service clearances
The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.
Figure 1. Service clearances f/75 single frame systems with slimline doors
Figure 2. Service clearances f/75 single frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
89
Planning
The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.
Figure 3. Service clearances f/75 single-frame systems with acoustical doors
Figure 4. Service clearances f/75 single-frame systems with acoustical doors (with alternative right-side
service clearance)
Front service access is necessary on the model 185/75 to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large
drawers (the processor books and I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to accommodate
the lift tool for servicing of the optional integrated battery backup.
Figure 5. Floor plan considerations for single units
90
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Approximate system weights by configuration
If the system that you order weighs more than 1134 kg (2500 lb.) when it is shipped from the factory, a
weight-distribution plate will be provided for the system. This plate is used to minimize the point loading from
casters and leveling pads.
Table 1. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with integrated battery backup
Number of
processor
drawers
0
1
620 (1367)
725 (1599) 824 (1817)1 923 (2035)2
2
677 (1493)
894 (1972) 1111 (2450) 1210 (2668)1 1309 (2886)2
3
958 (2112) 1063 (2344) 1169 (2576) 1274 (2808) 1373 (3026)1 1472 (3244)2
4
1015 (2238) 1121 (2470) 1226 (2702) 1331 (2934)
1436 (3167) 1535 (3385)1
5
1072 (2364) 1178 (2596) 1283 (2828) 1388 (3061)
1493 (3293)
6
1130 (2490) 1235 (2723) 1340 (2955) 1445 (3187)
1551 (3419)
7
1187 (2617) 1292 (2849) 1397 (3081) 1503 (3313)
8
1244 (2743) 1349 (2975) 1455 (3207) 1560 (3439)
9
1301 (2869) 1406 (3101) 1512 (3333)
10
1358 (2995) 1464 (3227) 1569 (3459)
11
1416 (3121) 1521 (3353)
12
1473 (3247) 1578 (3479)
kg (lb.)3
Drawers (I/O and switches)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not
supported
Note:
1. This configuration is only valid when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is only valid when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. For systems with slimline doors subtract 9 kg (19 lb.).
Table 2. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and without integrated battery backup
(lb.)1
Number of
processor
drawers
0
1
531 (1168)
kg
Drawers (I/O and switches)
1
2
3
4
5
6
636 (1400) 735 (1618)1 835 (1836)2
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
91
Planning
2
587 (1294)
714 (1574)
841 (1853) 939 (2071)1 1038 (2289)2
3
687 (1515)
793 (1747)
898 (1979) 1003 (2211) 1102 (2429)1 1201 (2647)2
4
744 (1641)
850 (1873)
955 (2105) 1060 (2337) 1166 (2570) 1265 (2788)1 1364 (3006)3
5
802 (1767)
907 (1999) 1012 (2231) 1117 (2464) 1223 (2696) 1328 (2928)
6
859 (1893)
964 (2126) 1069 (2358) 1175 (2590) 1280 (2822) 1385 (3054)
7
916 (2020) 1021 (2252) 1127 (2484) 1232 (2716) 1337 (2948) 1430 (3152)
8
973 (2146) 1078 (2378) 1184 (2610) 1289 (2842) 1394 (3074)
9
1030 (2272) 1136 (2504) 1241 (2736) 1346 (2968) 1439 (3172)
10
1088 (2398) 1193 (2630) 1298 (2862) 1403 (3094)
11
1145 (2524) 1250 (2756) 1355 (2988) 1448 (3192)
12
1202 (2650) 1307(2882) 1412 (3114)
Note:
1. This configuration is only valid when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is only valid when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. For systems with slimline doors subtract 9 kg (19 lb.).
Power cord features
The following three-phase power cord features are available for the three-phase model 185/75:
Table 1. Power cord features
Supply type
Nominal voltage range (V ac)
Voltage tolerance (V
ac)
Frequency range
(Hz)
200-480
180-509
47-63
Voltage (V ac)
Plug
Two 3-phase power
cords
Feature code
Description
8697
Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
480
IEC309 30 A plug
8698
Power cord, 8 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft.)
480
IEC309 30 A plug
8688
Power cord, 6 AWG/Type W, 4.3 m
(14 ft.)
200-240
IEC309 60 A plug
8689
Power cord, 6 AWG/Type W, 1.8 m (6
ft.)
200-240
IEC309 60 A plug
8686
Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
200-240
IEC309 100 A plug
8687
Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft.)
200-240
IEC309 100 A plug
86941
Power cord, 6 AWG/Type W, 4.3 m
(14 ft.)
200-240
No plug
86771
Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
380-415
No plug
Note:
92
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
1. These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician may be required to install
the plug and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.
Doors and covers
Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety and electromagnetic
compatibility compliance. The following rear door options are available for the model 185/75:
• Enhanced acoustical cover option
This feature provides a low-noise option for customers or sites with stringent acoustical requirements
and where a minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of special
front and rear doors that are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment
that lowers the noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline
doors. This reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single model system
with slimline covers is about the same as the noise level of five model systems with acoustical covers.
• Slimline cover option
This feature provides a smaller-footprint and lower-cost option for customers or sites where space is
more critical than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is
approximately 100 mm (4 in.) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in.) deep. No
acoustical treatment is available for this option.
• Rear door heat exchanger option
The rear door heat exchanger is a water-cooled device that mounts on the rear of the 19-inch and
24-inch racks to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply hose
delivers chilled, conditioned water to the heat exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back
to the water pump or chiller. Each rear door heat exchanger can remove up to 50 000 Btu (or
approximately 15 000 watts) of heat from your data center. For detailed information on preparing your
data center for using the rear door heat exchanger, see Planning for the installation of rear door heat
exchangers. For detailed information about installing a heat exchanger on your rack, see Installing the
rear door heat exchanger.
For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Acoustical noise emissions.
Raised-floor requirements and preparation
A raised-floor is strongly recommended for the model its associated rack to ensure optimal performance for
system cooling, cable management, and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements.
Raised-floor cutouts should be protected by electrically nonconductive molding, appropriately sized, with
edges treated to prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
93
Planning
Cut and place floor panels
This section provides recommendations for making the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing the
model 185/75.
The x-y alphanumeric grid positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that may be
cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.
Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) may be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 525 kg (1160 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 1050 kg (2320 lb)..
6. Use the raised floor figure below to install the panels in the proper positions.
Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the casters or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, tiles bearing the
weight (having casters or leveling pads on the tiles) should be uncut to retain the strength of
the floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of
floor cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.
Figure 1. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels
94
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Secure the rack
Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.
The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for the model 185/75.
• RPQ 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor (nonraised floor)
• RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 228.6 mm to 330.2
mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth)
• RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 304.8 mm to 558.8
mm (12 in. to 22 in. depth)
Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure, you must complete the floor
preparation described in Cut and place floor panels and the procedures described in Attach the rack to a
concrete (nonraised) floor or Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor.
Position the rack
To unpack and position the rack, do the following:
Note: See Moving the system to the installation site before attempting to position the rack.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.
Figure 1. Caster thumbscrew
5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it may be necessary to lay
down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Install the frame tie-down kit
The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie-down kit and floor tie-down hardware to secure a
rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth) or a 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm
(12 in. to 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.
• Position the rack
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
95
Planning
Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.
Attention: It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: The customer should obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate
anchoring of the mounting plates. A minimum of five anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to
secure the plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes may be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each mounting
plate must have at least five usable holes, two that are on the right-hand sides and the other two are on
opposite ends, and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand 1134 kg (2500
lb.) pulling force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between
the center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side
distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).
Figure 1. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)
2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1), front and rear, in the approximate mounting position
under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) through the plate assembly holes at
the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 in Figure 1) to ensure
bolt positioning.
96
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and
the ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be
installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1) under the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in
Figure 1) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over the tapped holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) three or four rotations into the tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates
5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.
6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.) to
allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts may
protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt location
marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy duty concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the mounting
plates to the concrete floor.
Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb.). These
tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation. It is the customer's responsibility to
ensure the following steps are completed before the service representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Use the following to determine your next step:
1. If the rack is being attached to a short depth raised floor environment 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to
13 in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following
table.
Table 1. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
97
Planning
228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) Raised
Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P2999
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
2. If the rack is being attached to a deep raised floor environment 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22
in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following
table.
Table 2. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) Raised
Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P3000
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel channel
adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts is required. The customer must supply the floor eyebolts.
Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down:
• The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1578.5 kg (3480 lb.).
• The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1578.5 kg (3480 lb.)-system is 526.2
kg (1160 lb.). For a multiple system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 1052.3 kg (2320 lb.).
To install the eyebolts, do the following:
1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
♦ Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
♦ For a single frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be
secured to the subfloor.
♦ The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the
concrete floor surface.
♦ The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. Higher than 63.5
mm (2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
♦ The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to
withstand 1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the service of a qualified
consultant or structural engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these
eyebolts and to ensure that the raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading
specifications.
♦ To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the
holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of
the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side to side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1
in.) (the front to back distance)
3. Verify ♦
that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.
98
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Figure 1. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 2. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 3. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)
4. Install the eyebolts to the floor.
Figure 4. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
99
Planning
Figure 5. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
Figure 6. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
100
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Figure 7. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
Considerations for multiple system installations
In a mutiple-frame installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cut and place floor
panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 526 kg (1160 lb.) per caster and leveler. Thus, the total
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
101
Planning
concentrated load can be as high as 1052 kg (2320 lb.). Contact the floor tile manufacturer or consult a
structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.
When you are integrating a model 185/75 into an existing multiple-system environment, or when adding
additional systems to an installed 185/75, consider the following factors:
• Minimum aisle width
For multiple rows of systems containing one or more 185/75 models, the minimum aisle width in the
front of the system is 1473 mm (58 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.) in the rear of the system to allow room to
perform service operations. The front and rear service clearances should be at least 1473 mm (58 in.)
and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances are measured from the edges of the frame
(with doors open) to the nearest obstacle.
• Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cool" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cool aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the underfloor pressure
and perforations in the tile. A typical underfloor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300-400 cfm
through a 25 percent open 2 ft. by 2 ft. floor tile.
Figure 1. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems
102
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
103
Planning
Total system power consumption
The following table contains the maximum power requirements for the model 185/75.
Table 1. System power requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems (185/75 only) - (kW)
Processor
drawers
Total
number of
FC7836,
FC7657,
FC7675
and
FC7676)8, 9
I/O drawers and switch drawers
0
1
2
3
4
5
1
3.74
4.94
5.91,4
7.02, 4
2
6.94
8.14
9.24
10.31,4
11.42, 4
3
10.24
11.34
12.44
13.64
14.71, 4
15.82, 4
4
13.54
14.64
15.64
16.84
17.94
19.01, 5
5
16.74
17.84
18.95
20.05
21.25
22.33, 5
6
19.95
21.15
22.25
23.36
24.46
25.53, 6
7
23.26
24.36
25.46
26.56
27.63, 6
28.83, 6
8
26.46
27.66
28.76
29.86
30.93, 6
9
29.76
30.86
31.97
33.07
34.13, 7
10
32.97
34.07
35.27
36.37
11
36.27
37.37
38.43, 7
39.57
12
39.47
40.57
41.63, 7
6
22.31, 5
The following notes apply to the preceding table.
Note:
1. This configuration is valid only when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is valid only when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. Not supported with integrated battery backup.
4. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
60 A cord
allowed
redundant
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
5. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
60 A cord
allowed
redundant
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes
No
Yes
Only provided with 60 A power
cords
6. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
allowed
104
60 A cord
redundant
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Yes
No
No
Yes
7. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
allowed
60 A cord
redundant
No
Not applicable
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
No
Yes
8. The maximum number of processors per system is the total number of FC7836 plus FC7657 that can
be combined to a maximum of 12.
9. For each FC7657, FC7675, and FC7676 installed, subtract 0.2 kW from the total system power
specified in this table.
Maximum configurations are based on 64 memory cards per processor, two disk drives and four PCI adapter
cards. To determine the typical power consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the following typical
power values.
Component
Typical power value (W)
Disk drives
20
PCI adapter card
20
Memory book
10
Cooling requirements
The model 185/75 requires air for cooling. As shown in Figure 1, rows of model 185/75, and systems must
face front-to-front. The use of a raised floor is recommended to provide air through perforated floor panels
placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the cold aisles shown in Figure 1).
The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations shown in Cooling requirements graph.
Table 1. System cooling requirements for 1.9 GHz processor systems (185/75 only)
Number of
processor
drawers
FC7836 plus
FC76574
Number of I/O drawers and switch drawers
0
1
2
3
4
5
1
A
B
B1
C2
2
C
C
D
D1
D2
3
D
D
E
E
F1
F2
4
E
F
F
G
G
G1
5
G
G
G
H
H
I3
6
H
H
I
I
J
J3
7
I
J
J
J
K3
K3
8
K
K
K
L
L3
M3
9
L
L
M
M3
10
M
M
N
N3
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
6
I2
105
Planning
11
N
O
O3
12
P
P
P3
P3
Note:
1. This configuration is valid only when populated with one 7045-SW4 switch drawer.
2. This configuration is valid only when populated with two 7045-SW4 switch drawers.
3. Not supported with integrated battery backup.
4. The maximum number of processors per system is the total number of FC7836 plus FC7657
processor drawers that can be combined to a maximum of 12.
Cooling requirements graph
Figure 1. Cooling requirements graph
Moving the system to the installation site
Prior to moving the system to the installation site, you should:
• Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
• You should verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to allow moving
the system to the installation site.
• Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on are sufficient to allow
moving the system to the installation site. If the height or weight of the system can cause a problem
when the system is moved to the installation site, you should contact your local site planning,
marketing, or sales representative.
For more detailed information, see Access.
106
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
If needed, a height reduction feature 7960 may be ordered. This feature allows for the system frame and the
expansion frame to be shipped in two pieces and assembled at your location. With this feature, the top section
of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed. The height of the system frame with the
upper section removed is reduced by .35 m (14 in.) to approximately 1.64 m (65 in.). For planning purposes,
the weight of the rack top frame and components are shown in the following table.
Table 1. Weight of rack top frame and components
Weight1
Item
Rack top frame and crate
210.5 kg (463 lb.)
Rack top frame with power (4 bulk power regulators, 4 bulk power 149.5 kg (329 lb.)
distributors, and 2 bulk power assemblies)2
Bulk power regulator
13.6 kg (30 lb.)
Bulk power distributor
6.4 kg (14 lb.)
Bulk power assembly
18 kg (40 lb.)
Rack top frame without rails
30 kg (66 lb.)
Rack top frame with rails
33 kg (73 lb.)
Side
cover3
22.7 kg (50 lb.)
Front acoustic door
17.9 kg (39.4 lb.)
Rear acoustic door
17.2 kg (37.9 lb.)
Front slimline door
17.2 kg (38 lb.)
Rear slimline door
9.1 kg (20 lb.)
Note:
1. Maximum total weight can be up to 255 kg (ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ lb.)
2. Can be shipped with up to six bulk power regulators and six bulk power distributors.
3. Each side cover consists of two panels.
Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment
DANGERHeavy equipment
mishandled. (D006)
personal injury or equipment damage might result if
You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning information
provided, with assistance from an authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery,
prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the
equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the
time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the
transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The
authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as
needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers
when you relocate or dispose of equipment.
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
107
Planning
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Depending on the number of bulk power regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur in line
currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power cords. Phase
currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table illustrates phase
imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power consumption, see Total system
power consumption.
Table 1. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA Phase A line current Phase B line current Phase C line current
1
Power / Vline
Power / Vline
0
2
0.5 Power / Vline
0.866 Power / Vline
0.5 Power / Vline
3
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power / Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal
input voltage. Since total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power
number by two.
Balancing power panel loads
When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be fully
balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel loads,
while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of the three
phases will draw an equal amount of current, and will be, nominally, 57.8 percent of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three phases will carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from two
power panels in a way that balances the load among the three phases.
Note: Use of ground fault interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because GFI
circuit breakers are earth leakage current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high earth leakage
current product.
Figure 1. Power panel load balancing
108
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians may prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to balance
the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are alternated
with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.
Figure 2. Power panel load balancing
The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the three-pole
breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.
Figure 3. Power panel load balancing
Power cord configurations
The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure. For
raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and through the
same floor-tile cutout. For more information about raised-floor applications, refer to Cut and place floor panels
and Figure 1.
Figure 1. Single-frame system power cord configuration
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
109
Planning
110
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Dual power installation
The model 185/75 is designed with dual power cords with a fully redundant power system, except on some
larger configurations. Table 1 and Table 3 provide details for the configurations that have fully-redundant
power and those that do not. To take full advantage of the redundancy and reliability that is built into the
system, the system must be powered from two different power distribution panels. The possible power
installation configurations are described in Dual power installations.
Weight distribution
The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for the model 185/75. Use this figure in conjunction
with the floor loading tables to determine the floor loading for various configurations.
Figure 1. Floor loading dimensions
The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for the model 185/75. Weights include
covers, width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 1. Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 processors,
2 I/O drawers, and without integrated battery
backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
1 frame
lb./ft2 kg/m2
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 206.6 1008.7
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 168.0 820.4
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 143.0 698.1
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 140.6 686.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 116.0 566.5
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 100.1 488.7
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 107.3 523.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 89.8
438.6
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 78.5
383.2
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 88.9
434.1
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
111
Planning
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 75.3
367.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 66.5
324.8
Note:
1. Floor calculations should not be
based on a weight shed area beyond
30 in. from each side of the system.
2. All floor calculations are intended for
a raised-floor environment.
3. Contact your supplier or structural
engineer for further assistance with
calculating floor load.
Table 2. Floor loading for system with 12 processors, 1 I/O drawer, and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 processors,
1 I/O drawer, and with integrated battery
backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
1 frame
lb./ft2 kg/m2
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 229.1 1118.5
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 185.7 906.9
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 157.6 769.5
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 154.9 756.2
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 127.3 621.5
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 109.4 534.1
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 117.5 573.7
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 97.9
477.8
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 85.1
415.5
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 96.8
472.8
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.6
398.3
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.7
349.9
Note:
1. Floor calculations should not be
based on a weight shed area beyond
30 in. from each side of the system.
2. All floor calculations are intended for
a raised-floor environment.
3. Contact your supplier or structural
engineer for further assistance with
calculating floor load.
Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in Considerations
for multiple system installations.
112
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
Unit emergency power off
The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame). Refer to
the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.
Figure 1. Unit emergency power off figure
When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment. All volatile data will
be lost.
It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.
If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from the
system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on system
configuration.
Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries engage and the
computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine EPO. When
this is done, resetting the room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal battery
backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.
To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this connection is
made.
Figure 1. Computer room emergency power off figure
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
113
Planning
The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging into
the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the room
EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.
In the following figure, AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For room
EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This connection
should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft.) of #24 AWG.
Figure 2. AMP connector figure
Machine holdup times
The following tables illustrate typical machine holdup times (time versus load) for fresh and aged batteries.
• All times are listed in minutes
• Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined)
• A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
• An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.
Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 1. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Machine load
3.3 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
N
R
N
R
1 BPR
7.0
21.0
2.1
7.0
114
10 kW
N
R
13.33 kW
N
R
16.67 kW
N
R
20 kW
N
R
21.67 kW
N
R
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Planning
2 BPR
21.0 50.0
21.0
4.0
11.0
2.1
7.0
3 BPR
32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0
7.0
7.0
21.0
4.9
12.0
3.2
9.5
2.1
7.0
1.7
6.5
N=Nonredundant, R=Redundant
Table 2. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Machine load
3.3 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
10 kW
N
R
N
R
1 BPR
4.2
12.6
1.3
4.2
2 BPR
12.6 30.0
4.2
3 BPR
19.2 41.0
7.2
13.33 kW
N
R
N
R
12.6
2.4
6.6
1.3
4.2
19.2
4.2
12.6
2.9
7.2
16.67 kW
20 kW
21.67 kW
N
R
N
R
N
R
1.9
5.7
1.3
4.2
1.0
3.9
N=Nonredundant, R=Redundant
Table 3. Bulk power regulator rules6
Bulk power regulator (BPR) per bulk power assembly (BPA) rules
Number of
processor
drawers
Number of I/O drawers and switch drawers
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
12
12
12
12
Not applicable1
Not applicable1
Not applicable
2
12
22
22
22
22
Not applicable1
Not applicable
3
22
22
22
32
32
32
Not applicable
4
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
5
32
32
33
33
33
33
Not applicable
6
33
33
33
34
34
34
Not applicable
7
34
34
34
34
34
34
Not applicable
8
34
34
34
34
34
Not applicable
Not applicable
9
34
34
35
35
35
Not applicable
Not applicable
10
35
35
35
35
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
11
35
35
35
35
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
12
35
35
35
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
13
33
33
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
14
33
33
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
The following notes apply to the preceding table.
Note:
1. Maximum of two 7045-SW4 switches in rack and one 5791 or 5794 per processor drawer.
2. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
allowed
60 A cord
redundant
Planning for model 185/75 server specifications
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
115
Planning
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
60 A cord
allowed
redundant
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
Yes
No
Yes
Yes - for 60 A cords
No - for other cords
4. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
allowed
60 A cord
redundant
Yes
No
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
No
Yes
5. Power cord and bulk power jumper rules for this configuration:
60 A cord
allowed
60 A cord
redundant
No
Not applicable
Other cords redundant Bulk power jumper provided
No
Yes
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server
specifications
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of the model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server
specifications, including dimensions, electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances.
You will also find links to more detailed information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
The server model ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R consist of multiple components, as
summarized in the following table.
Table 1. Model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R components
Model
Description
Minimum per
system
Maximum per system
FC6251
Slimline door set for primary rack (front and
rear) See Doors and covers.
1
1
FC6252
Acoustic door set for primary rack (front and
rear) See Doors and covers.
1
1
FC8691
Optional expansion frame
0
1
0
1
(Based on number of I/O and switch
drawers installed.)
FC6253
Slimline door set for 8691 (front and rear)
FC6254
Acoustical door set for 8691 (front and rear)
0
1
ESCALA PL 6450R 16-way, 2.1 GHz processor book
(FC8970)
110
4
16-way, 2.3 GHz processor book
110
4
116
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications
Planning
ESCALA PL 6450R
(FC8968)
ESCALA PL 3250R 16-way, 2.1 GHz processor book
(FC8967)
110
9406-595 (FC8966) 16-way, 1.9 GHz processor book
110
4
9406-595 (FC8981) 16-way, 1.65 GHz processor book
110
4
ESCALA PL 3250R 16-way, 1.9 GHz processor book
(FC7891)
110
2
ESCALA PL 6450R 16-way, 1.9 GHz processor book
(FC7913)
110
4
110
4
04
24
0 (9406)
8-way or 16-way: 6
drawers maximum1
2
ESCALA PL 6450R 16-way, 1.9 GHz processor book
(FC8969)
ESCALA PL 6450R 16-way, 1.65 GHz processor book
(FC7988)
FC57/92
Optional base rack. See Planning for 57/92
base rack.
Various
Hardware Management Console (HMC)6
7040-61D
Optional I/O drawer (20 PCI cards max., 16
disk drives maximum)
57/91
1 (9119)
32-way: 12 drawers
maximum2
57/94
48-way and 64-way: 4
drawers maximum3
9406-5959
FC6200 or FC6201 Optional integrated battery backup feature
FC3757
Service Shelf Tool
Kit8
Base PCI-X Expansion tower (9406-595
only)
0
6
1
1
1
1
Note:
1. For the ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R, the 16-way processor configuration supports up
to 6 I/O drawers.
2. For the ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R, the 32-way processor configurations support up
to 12 I/O drawers.
3. For the ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R, the 48-way and 64-way processor
configurations support a maximum of 12 I/O drawers, which require a FC57/92 frame.
4. An HMC can connect to multiple systems (therefore, an HMC may not need to be ordered), or up to
two HMCs can connect to the system for redundancy.
5. For the ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R, the The 32-way, 48-way, and 64-way processor
configurations are based on the combining of multiple 16-way processors. The 8-way processor
configuration is a 16-way with eight processors available for upgrade on demand.
6. For the model ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R, a Hardware Management Console must
be provided within the same room and within 8 m (26 ft.) of the server.
7. The 32-way processor configuration of the ESCALA PL 3250R supports a maximum of eight I/O
drawers.
8. The FC3757 Service Shelf Tool Kit contains six separate tool kits that are required for the installation
and maintenance of the ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R and 9406-595 processor books and
memory cards. Each kit weighs
40 lb. Without this feature, installation and maintenance may be delayed. At least one FC3757 is
required on site where one or more model ESCALA PL 3250R or ESCALA PL 6450R are located.
9. A number 4643 indicates that a 406/1D I/O drawer is installed in the 24-inch primary rack of a model
9406-595. One to four 4643s may be installed. Only AIX and Linux operating system supported I/O
features may be installed in the 406/1D. Other I/O towers or drawers may be attached via HSL/RIO
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications
117
Planning
loops.
10. Minimum per system is based on one processor with this feature code. Processor feature codes
cannot be mixed.
Table 2. Specifications for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R
Specifications for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R14
Plan views
Top down view
ASHRAE declarations (heat load data for various configurations)
Dimensions and weight8
Slimline doors1
Physical
characteristic
Acoustical doors1
1 Frame
2 Frames
1 Frame
2 Frames
Height
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
2025 mm
(79.7 in.)
Width
785 mm (30.9 in.)
1575 mm (62.0 in.)
785 mm (30.9 in.)
1575 mm
(62.0 in.)
Depth
1326 mm (52.2 in.)
1326 mm (52.2 in.)
1681 mm (66.2 in.)
1681 mm
(66.2 in.)
Weight10 - model ESCALA PL 6450R and 9406-595maximum configuration
With integrated battery Without integrated battery With integrated battery Without
backup and slimline backup with slimline doors
backup and with
integrated
doors13
acoustical doors13
battery
backup
and with
acoustical
doors
Single frame
1419 kg (3128 lb.)
1358 kg (2995 lb.)
1427 (3147 lb.)
1367 kg
(3014 lb.)
Double frame12
2441 kg (5381 lb.)
2381 kg (5249 lb.)
2458 (5420 lb.)
2398
(5287 lb.)
Weight10 - model ESCALA PL 3250R maximum configuration
With integrated battery Without integrated battery
backup and with
backup and with slimline
slimline doors13
doors
With integrated battery Without
backup and with
integrated
acoustical doors13
battery
backup
and with
acoustical
doors
Single frame
1419 kg (3128 lb.)
1358 kg (2995 lb.)
1427 kg (3147 lb.)
1367 kg
(3014 lb.)
Double frame12
2230 kg (4917 lb.)
1960 kg (4321 lb.)
2248 kg (4956 lb.)
1977 kg
(4359 lb.)
Shipping dimensions and weight9
Height
2311 mm (91 in.)
Width
940 mm (37 in.)
Depth
1511 mm (59.5 in.)
Weight
Varies by configuration
Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase) - ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R - for
additional information, see Total system power consumption
118
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications
Planning
Rated voltage and frequency (3 phase)
200 to 240 V ac at 50 to
60 Hz
380 to 415 V ac at 50 to
60 Hz
480 V ac
at 50 to
60 Hz
60
32
24
32
24
0.97
0.93
77.5 kBtu/hr
77.5 kBtu/hr
77.5
kBtu/hr
69.3 kBtu/hr
69.3 kBtu/hr
Rated current, power cord with 100 A plug
FC 8686 or 8687 (amps per phase)
Rated current, power cord with 60 A plug,
FC 8688 or 8689 (amps per phase)
48
Rated current, all other power cords (amps
per phase)
60
Maximum power (1.9 GHz processor)
22.7 kW
Maximum power (1.65 GHz processor)
20.3 kW
Power factor, typical
Inrush current
0.99
(maximum)3
163 A
Thermal output (maximum for 1.9 GHz
processor)
Thermal output (maximum for 1.65 GHz
processor)
ESCALA PL 6450R,
ESCALA PL 3250R
Phase
69.3
kBtu/hr
3
Dual power feature code
Standard7
Branch circuit breaker and cord information
See Breaker rating and cord
information
Power cord length
4.2 m (14 ft.) - all locations (except
Chicago)
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United States (Chicago)
Environment specifications
Recommended operating temperature5 (16-way, 32-way)
10 degrees to 32 degrees C (50
degrees to 89.6 degrees F)
Recommended operating temperature5 (48-way and 64-way)
10 degrees to 28 degrees C (50
degrees to 82.4 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature (All models)
10 degrees to 43 degrees C (50
degrees to 109.4 degrees F)
Storage temperature (All models)
1 degree to 60 degrees C (33.8
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Shipping temperature (All models)
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40
degrees to 140 degrees F)
Maximum wet
bulb
Operating
Nonoperating
Storage4
Shipping4
23 degrees C (73.4
degrees F)
23 degrees C (73.4
degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6
degrees F)
29
degrees
C (84.2
degrees
F)
Noncondensing
relative
humidity
8 to 80 %
Maximum
altitude
8 to 80 %
5 to 80 %
5 to 100
%
8-way, 16-way, 32-way - 3048 m (10000 ft.)
48-way, 64-way - 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Acoustical noise
Product
configuration
Typical
configuration
with two
processors,
emissions6, 15
LWAd (Bels)6
LpAM (dB)6 (bystander, 1 m)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
7.6
7.6
59
59
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications
119
Planning
two I/O
drawers, and
bulk power
unit; acoustical
door set
Typical
configuration
with two
processors,
two I/O
drawers, and
bulk power
unit; slimline
door set
8.3
8.3
65
65
Maximum
configuration
with four
processors,
four I/O
drawers, and
bulk power
unit; acoustical
door set
7.9
7.9
61
61
8.611
8.611
6811
6811
Maximum
configuration
with four
processors,
four I/O
drawers, and
bulk power
unit; slimline
door set
Service clearances
For a graphical representation of service clearances, see Service clearances
Seismic considerations: See Secure the rack
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950-1;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences
Note:
1. Doors are not installed during product shipment to the customer.
2. Refer to Approximate system weights by configuration for the approximate weight of your system
configuration.
3. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No
inrush currents occur during the normal power off-on cycle.
4. When an approved vapor bag and desiccant packets are used to protect the system, the storage
specifications are valid for 6 months and the shipping specifications are valid for 1 month. Otherwise,
storage and shipping specifications are valid for two weeks each.
5. For the 8-way, 16-way, and 32-way processor configurations, the upper limit of the dry bulb
temperature must be derated 1 degree C (1.8 degrees F) per 219 m (719 ft.) above 1295 m (4250
ft.). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft.). For the 48-way and 64-way configurations, the upper
limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 degree C (1.8 degrees F) per 210 m (688 ft.)
above 1295 m (4250 ft.). Maximum altitude is 2133 m (7000 ft.).
6. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure
measured at the 1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
7. Dual power and power cords are standard on the Model ESCALA PL 3250R, 9406-595, and
ESCALA PL 6450R. For maximum availability, each of the power cords should be fed from
120
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R server specifications
Planning
independent power grids.
8. For specific configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration. The feature
code 7960 (Compact Handling Option) allows the processor or expansion frame to pass through
doors that are less than 2.0 m (79.5 in.). The top 8U section of the frame, including the power
subsystem, is removed at the factory and shipped separately for installation at the customer location.
The height of the rack with the upper section removed is approximately 1.65 m (65 in.).
9. Shipping dimensions are indicated for each frame. Each frame is shipped separately.
10. See Approximate system weights by configuration for detailed information on weights based on
configuration.
11. Attention: Your server installation may be subject to government regulations (such as those
prescribed by OSHA or European Community Directives that cover noise level exposure in the
workplace. The model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R 9406-595 is available with an
optional acoustical door feature that can reduce the likelihood of exceeding noise level exposure
limits for densely populated racks. The actual sound pressure levels in your installation will depend
on a variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation; the size, materials, and
configuration of the room where the racks are installed; the noise levels from other equipment; the
room ambient temperature, and employees' location in relation to the equipment. It is recommended
that a qualified person, such as an industrial hygienist, be consulted to determine whether the sound
pressure levels to which employees may be exposed exceed regulatory limits.
12. The cabling requirements of the model ESCALA PL 6450R limit the distance between the server
frame and a separately powered I/O frame. See Special considerations for model ESCALA PL
6450R cabling for details.
13. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
To effectively plan for the model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R, the following topics are also
provided.
• Breaker rating and cord information
• Power cord features
• Doors and covers
• Plan views
• Raised-floor requirements and preparation
• Cut and place floor panels
• Secure the rack
• Position the rack
• Install the frame tie-down kit
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
• Considerations for multiple system installations
• Service clearances
• Total system power consumption
• Cooling requirements
• Moving the system to the installation site
• Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
• Balancing power panel loads
• Power cord configurations
• Dual power installation
• Approximate system weights by configuration
• Weight distribution
• Unit emergency power off
• Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
• Machine holdup times
Doors and covers
Doors and covers are an integral part of the system and are required for product safety and electromagnetic
compatibility compliance. The following rear door options are available for your server:
• Enhanced acoustical cover option
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
121
Planning
This feature provides a low-noise option for customers or sites with stringent acoustical requirements
and where a minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of a special
front and rear doors that are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment
that lowers the noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline
doors. This reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single model system
with slimline covers is about the same as the noise level of five model systems with acoustical covers.
• Slimline cover option
This feature provides a smaller-footprint and lower-cost option for customers or sites where space is
more critical than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is
approximately 100 mm (4 in.) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in.) deep. No
acoustical treatment is available for this option.
• Rear Door Heat Exchanger for 14T/42 option
The Heat Exchanger is a water-cooled device that mounts on the rear of the 19-inch and 24-inch
racks to cool the air that is heated and exhausted by devices inside the rack. A supply hose delivers
chilled, conditioned water to the Heat Exchanger. A return hose delivers warmed water back to the
water pump or chiller. Each Heat Exchanger can remove up to 50 000 Btu (or approximately 15 000
watts) of heat from your data center. For detailed information on preparing your data center for using
the Heat Exchanger, see Planning for the installation of rear door heat exchangers. For detailed
information about installing a Heat Exchanger on your rack, see Installing the rear door heat
exchanger.
Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Acoustical noise emissions.
Plan views
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for single-frame systems.
Figure 1. Plan view for single-frame systems with acoustical doors
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for double-frame systems.
Figure 2. Plan view for double-frame systems with acoustical doors
122
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each caster
swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.
Figure 3. Leveling foot and frame dimensions
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat
Release
Airflow
nominal1
Airflow
maximum1
at 35
Weight
degrees C
(95
degrees F)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Overall system
dimensions
123
Planning
Description
kW
cfm m3/hr cfm m3/hr
Minimum
configuration
6.1
635 1080 915 1556
See ESCALA PL
3250R, ESCALA PL
6450R
See ESCALA PL 3250R,
ESCALA PL 6450R
Maximum
configuration
22.7
1760 2992 2460 4182
See ESCALA PL
3250R, ESCALA PL
6450R
See ESCALA PL 3250R,
ESCALA PL 6450R
Typical
configuration
13.0
1310 2227 1790 3043
See ESCALA PL
3250R, ESCALA PL
6450R
See ESCALA PL 3250R,
ESCALA PL 6450R
ASHRAE Class
3
Minimum
configuration
16-way with a single I/O drawer
Maximum
configuration
64-way with 4 I/O drawers
Typical
configuration
32-way with 4 I/O drawers
Figure 1. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Total system power consumption
The following table contains the maximum power requirements for the model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA
PL 6450R.
Table 1. System power requirements for 1.9 GHz, 2.1 GHz, or 2.3 GHz processor systems (ESCALA PL
6450R only) - (kW)
I/O drawers and switches Processor books
1
124
2
3
4
0
6.1
11.1 15.2 19.2
1
7.0
12.1 16.1 20.1
2
8.0
13.0 17.0 21.0
3
8.9
13.9 17.9 21.91
4
9.8
14.8 18.9 22.71
5
10.7 15.7
6
11.6 16.6
7
17.5
8
18.5
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
9
19.4
10
20.3
11
21.21
12
22.11
Note:
1. 100 A power cord is required unless a
57/92 optional base rack is ordered and
the noted drawers are installed in the
57/92 rack. See Planning for 57/92 base
rack.
Table 2. System power requirements for 1.65 GHz processor systems ( ESCALA PL 3250R, and ESCALA PL
6450R - (kW)
I/O drawers and switches Processor books
1
2
3
4
0
5.1
9.3 12.5 15.7
1
6.1 10.2 13.5 16.6
2
7.0 11.2 14.4 17.6
3
7.9 12.1 15.3
4
8.8 13.0 16.2
5
9.8 13.9
6
10.7 14.8
7
15.8
8
16.7
9
17.6
10
18.5
11
12
Maximum configurations are based on 16 memory cards per processor book, 16 disk drives per I/O drawer.
20 PCI cards per I/O drawer and 16 switch cards per HPS switch. To determine the typical power
consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the following typical power values.
Table 3. Typical power values
Component
Typical power value (W)
Disk drives
20
I/O PCI card
20
Memory book
100
Switch card
30
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
125
Planning
Breaker rating and cord information
The following table illustrates the power cord options for the three-phase Model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA
PL 6450R with their geographic, breaker rating, and cord information.
Table 1. Breaker rating and cord information
3-phase supply voltage (50/60
Hz)
200-240 V
200-240 V
380-415 V
480 V
Recommended
customer-circuit-breaker rating
(see Note below)
60 A (60-A plug)or80 A
(100-A plug)
63 A (no plug)
32 A (no plug)
30 A(30A
plug)
Cord information
1.8 m (6 ft.) and 4.3 m (14
ft.) 6 AWG power cord
(60-A plug), or 1.8 m (6 ft.)
and 4.3 m (14 ft.) 6 AWG
power cord (100-A Plug)
14 foot, 6 AWG
power cord,
(electrician
installed)
14 foot, 8 AWG 6 and 14
power cord,
foot,
(electrician
8AWG
installed)
power cord
(30A plug)
Recommended receptacle
IEC309, 60 A, type
460R9W (not provided) or
IEC309, 100A, type
4100R9W (not provided)
Not specified,
electrician
installed
Not specified,
electrician
installed
IEC309,
30 A, type
430R7W
(not
provided)
Note:
1. The exact circuit breaker ratings may not be available in all countries. Where the specified circuit
breaker ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. Use of a time delayed circuit
breaker is recommended. Use of a GFI circuit breaker is not recommended.
2. When possible, use metal backbox with power cords using IEC-309 plugs.
Service clearances
The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figures.
Figure 1. Service clearances for single frame systems with slimline doors
126
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Figure 2. Service clearances for single frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)
Figure 3. Service clearances for double-frame systems with slimline doors
The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figures.
Figure 4. Service clearances for single-frame systems with acoustical doors
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
127
Planning
Figure 5. Service clearances for single-frame systems with acoustical doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)
Figure 6. Service clearances for double-frame systems with acoustical doors
Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances shown in a raised-floor
installation.
Secure the rack
128
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.
The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for the model ESCALA PL
3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R.
• RPQ 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor (nonraised floor)
• RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when on a raised floor 241 mm to 298.5 mm (9.5
in. to 11.75 in. high)
• RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when on a raised floor 298.5 mm to 406.4 mm
(11.75 in. to 16 in. high)
Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure you must complete the floor preparation
described in Cut and place floor panels and the procedures described in Attach the rack to a concrete
(nonraised) floor or Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor.
Approximate system weights by configuration
If the system that you order has a frame that weighs more than 1134 kg (2500 lb.) when it is shipped from the
factory, a weight-distribution plate will be provided for the system. This plate is used to minimize the point
loading from casters and leveling pads.
Table 1. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and with integrated battery backup
I/O drawers and switches with redundant integrated battery
backup (non-redundant available)
kg (lb.)1, 2
Processor books
1
2
3
4
0
809 (1784)
1075
(2370)
1246
(2747)
1223
(2697)
1
908 (2002)
1092
(2408)
1263
(2785)
1322
(2915)
2
1125
(2480)
1309
(2887)
1368
(3017)
1427
(3147)
3
1534
(3382)
1719
(3789)
4
1639
(3614)
1824
(4021)
5
1744
(3846)
1929
(4253)
6
1853
(4085)
2037
(4492)
7
2143
(4724)
8
2248
(4956)
9
2353
(5188)
10
2458
(5420)
11
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
129
Planning
12
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater
than two I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame
with three or four processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O
drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The ESCALA PL 3250R with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
Table 2. Approximate system weights with acoustical covers and without integrated battery backup
(lb.)1, 2, 3
I/O drawers and switches without integrated battery
backup
kg
Processor books
1
2
3
4
0
719 (1585)
895 (1972)
975 (2150)
952
(2100)
1
818 (1803)
912 (2010)
992 (2188)
1051
(2318)
2
944 (2082)
1039 (2290) 1098 (2420)
1157
(2550)
3
1050 (2315) 1158 (2522) 1203 (2652)
1262
(2782)
4
1155 (2547) 1249 (2754) 1308 (2884)
1367
(3014)
5
1564 (3448) 1658 (3656)
6
1669 (3680) 1764 (3888)
7
1869 (4120)
8
1977 (4359)
9
2082 (4591)
10
2188 (4823)
11
2293 (5055)
12
2398 (5287)
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater
than two I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame
with three or four processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O
drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The ESCALA PL 3250R with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
kg (lb.)1, 2
Table 3. Approximate system weights with slimline covers and with integrated battery backup
I/O drawers and switches with redundant integrated battery
backup (non-redundant available)
0
130
Processor books
1
2
801 (1765) 985 (2371)
3
4
1156
(2748)
1215
(2678)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
1
900 (1983)
1084
(2389)
1255
(2766)
1314
(2896)
2
1116
(2461)
1301
(2868)
1360
(2998)
1419
(3128)
3
1517
(3344)
1619
(3750)
4
1622
(3576)
1806
(3982)
5
1727
(3808)
1911
(4214)
6
1836
(4047)
2020
(4453)
7
2125
(4685)
8
2230
(4917)
9
2335
(5149)
10
2441
(5381)
11
12
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater
than two I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame
with three or four processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O
drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The ESCALA PL 3250R with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
Table 4. Approximate system weights with slimline covers and without integrated battery backup
kg (lb.)1, 2,
3
I/O drawers and switches without integrated battery
backup
Processor books
1
2
3
4
0
710 (1566)
886 (1953)
967 (2131)
944
(2081)
1
809 (1784)
903 (1991)
984 (2169)
1043
(2299)
2
936 (2063)
1030 (2271) 1089 (2401)
1148
(2531)
3
1041 (2295) 1135 (2503) 1194 (2633)
1253
(2763)
4
1146 (2527) 1241 (2735) 1299 (2865)
1358
(2995)
5
1547 (3410) 1641 (3618)
6
1652 (3642) 1746 (3850)
7
1852 (4082)
8
1960 (4321)
9
2065 (4553)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
131
Planning
10
2170 (4785)
11
2276 (5017)
12
2381 (5249)
Note:
1. A primary rack with one or two processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater
than two I/O drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC8691. A primary frame
with three or four processor books and either greater than four I/O drawers or greater than two I/O
drawers and two integrated battery backup units requires a FC5792.
2. The ESCALA PL 3250R with two processor books supports a maximum of eight I/O drawers.
Power cord features
The following three-phase power cord features are available for the three-phase model ESCALA PL 3250R,
195/95:
Table 1. Power cord features
Supply type
Nominal voltage range (V ac)
Voltage tolerance (V
ac)
Frequency
range (Hz)
200-480
180-509
47-63
Two redundant three-phase power
cords
Feature code
Description
Voltage (V ac)
Plug
8697
Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14
ft.)
480
IEC309 30 A
plug
8698
Power cord, 8 AWG, 1.8 m (6
ft.)
480
IEC309 30 A
plug
8688
Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14
ft.)
200-240
IEC309 60 A
plug
8689
Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6
ft.)
200-240
IEC309 60 A
plug
8686
Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14
ft.)
200-240
IEC309 100
A plug
8687
Power cord, 6 AWG, 1.8 m (6
ft.)
200-240
IEC309 100
A plug
86941
Power cord, 6 AWG, 4.3 m (14
ft.)
200-240
no plug
86771
Power cord, 8 AWG, 4.3 m (14
ft.)
380-415
no plug
Note:
1. These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician may be required to install
the plug and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.
132
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Raised-floor requirements and preparation
A raised floor is required for the model ESCALA PL 6450R and its associated racks to ensure optimal
performance and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility requirements. A raised floor is not required for
the model ESCALA PL 3250R, but it is recommended for optimum system cooling and cable management.
Raised-floor cutouts should be protected by electrically nonconductive molding, appropriately sized, with
edges treated to prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.
Front-service access is necessary on the model ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R to accommodate
a lift tool for the servicing of large drawers (the processor books and I/O drawers). Front and rear service
access is necessary to accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the optional integrated battery backup.
Figure 1. Floor plan considerations for single units
Cut and place floor panels
This section provides guidelines for making the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing your
server.
The x-y alphanumeric grid positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that may be
cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Considerations for multiple system
installations. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.
Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) may be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 476 kg (1050 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 953 kg (2100 lb).
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
133
Planning
6. Use Figure 1 to install the panels in the proper positions.
Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the castors or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, we recommend
that tiles bearing the weight (having castors or leveling pads on the tiles) be uncut to retain
the strength of the floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of
floor cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.
Figure 1. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure
Position the rack
To unpack and position the rack, do the following:
Note: Before attempting to position the rack, see Moving the system to the installation site.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.
Figure 1. Caster thumbscrew
134
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it may be necessary to lay
down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Install the frame tie-down kit
The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie down kit and floor tie down hardware to secure a
rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth) or a 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm
(12 in. to 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.
• Position the rack
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor.
Attention: It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: The customer should obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate
anchoring of the mounting plates. A minimum of five anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to
secure the plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes may be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each mounting
plate must have at least five usable holes, two that are on the right-hand sides and the other two are on
opposite ends, and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand 1134 kg (2500
lb.) pulling force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between
the center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side
distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).
Figure 1. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
135
Planning
2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1), front and rear, in the approximate mounting position
under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) through the plate assembly holes at
the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 in Figure 1) to ensure
bolt positioning.
Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and
the ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be
installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1) under the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in
Figure 1) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over the tapped holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) three or four rotations into the tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure:
Figure 2. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates
5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.
6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.) to
allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts may
protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt location
marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy duty concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the mounting
plates to the concrete floor.
136
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb.). These
tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation.
Use the following to determine your next step:
1. If the rack is being attached to a short depth raised floor environment 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to
13 in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following
table.
Table 1. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
9" - 13" Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number
16R1102)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P2999
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
2. If the rack is being attached to a deep raised floor environment 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22
in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following
table.
Table 2. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number
16R1103)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P3000
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel channel
adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor eyebolts.
Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down:
• The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1429 kg (3150 lb.).
• The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1429 kg (3150 lb.)-system is 476.3 kg
(1050 lb.). For a multiple system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 952.5 kg (2100 lb.).
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
137
Planning
To install the eyebolts, do the following:
1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
♦ Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
♦ For a single frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be
secured to the subfloor.
♦ The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the
concrete floor surface.
♦ The maximum is height 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. Higher than 2.5
inches can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
♦ The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to
withstand 1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the service of a qualified
consultant or structural engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these
eyebolts and to ensure that the raised floor and the building can support the floor-loading
specifications.
♦ To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the
holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of
the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side to side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1
in.) (the front to back distance)
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.
Figure 1. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 2. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 3. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)
138
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
4. Install the eyebolts to the floor. The service representative can now install the frame.
Figure 4. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
Figure 5. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
139
Planning
Figure 6. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
Figure 7. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
140
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Considerations for multiple system installations
In a multi-frame installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cut and place floor
panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 476 kg (1050 lb.) per caster and leveler. Thus, the total
concentrated load can be as high as 953 kg (2100 lb.). Contact the floor tile manufacturer or consult a
structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.
When you are integrating a model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R into an existing multiple-system
environment, or when adding additional systems to an installed ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R,
consider the following factors:
• Minimum aisle width
For multiple rows of systems containing one or more model ESCALA PL 3250R, or ESCALA PL
6450R, the minimum aisle width in the front of the system is 1219 mm (48 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.) in
the rear of the system to allow room to perform service operations. The front and rear service
clearances should be at least 1219 mm (48 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances
are measured from the edges of the frame (with doors open) to the nearest obstacle.
• Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cool" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cool aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the underfloor pressure
and perforations in the tile. A typical underfloor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply 300-400 cfm
through a 25 percent open 2 ft. by 2 ft. floor tile.
Figure 1. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
141
Planning
Cooling requirements
The model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R require air for cooling. As shown in Figure 1, rows of
model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R systems must face front-to-front. The use of a raised floor is
recommended to provide air through perforated floor panels placed in rows between the fronts of systems (the
cold aisles shown in Figure 1).
The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling requirements
graph.
Table 1. System cooling requirements for 1.9 GHz, 2.1 GHz, or 2.3 GHz processor systems (ESCALA PL
6450R only)
Number of I/O drawers
142
Number of processor books
1
2
3
4
0
B
D
F
H
1
C
E
F
H
2
C
E
G
H
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
3
C
E
G
I
4
D
F
G
I
5
D
F
6
E
G
7
G
8
G
9
H
10
H
11
H
12
I
Table 2. System cooling requirements for 1.65 GHz processor systems ( ESCALA PL 3250R, and ESCALA
PL 6450R)
Number of I/O drawers
Number of processor books
1
2
3
4
0
B
D
E
F
1
B
D
E
G
2
C
D
F
G
3
C
E
F
G
4
C
E
F
H
5
D
E
6
D
F
7
F
8
G
9
G
10
G
11
H
12
H
Cooling requirements graph
Figure 1. Cooling requirements graph
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
143
Planning
Moving the system to the installation site
Prior to moving the system to the installation site, you should:
• Determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site.
• You should verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to allow moving
the system to the installation site.
• Verify that the weight limitations of elevators, ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on are sufficient to allow
moving the system to the installation site. If the height or weight of the system can cause a problem
when the system is moved to the installation site, you should contact your local site planning,
marketing, or sales representative.
For more detailed information, see Access.
If needed, a height reduction feature (0126 for and models, and 7960 for servers and servers) may be
ordered. This feature allows for the system frame (both , models,servers, and servers) and the expansion
frame (servers and servers only) to be shipped in two pieces and assembled at your location. With this
feature, the top section of the system frame (including the power subsystem) is removed. The height of the
system frame with the upper section removed is reduced by .35 m (14 in.) to approximately 1.64 m (65 in.).
For planning purposes, the weight of the rack top frame and components are shown in the following table.
Table 1. Weight of rack top frame and components
Weight1
Item
Rack top frame and crate
210.5 kg (463 lb.)
Rack top frame with power (4 bulk power regulators, 4 bulk power 149.5 kg (329 lb.)
distributors, and 2 bulk power assemblies)2
Bulk power regulator
13.6 kg (30 lb.)
Bulk power distributor
6.4 kg (14 lb.)
Bulk power assembly
18 kg (40 lb.)
Rack top frame without rails
30 kg (66 lb.)
Rack top frame with rails
33 kg (73 lb.)
Side
cover3
22.7 kg (50 lb.)
Front acoustic door
17.9 kg (39.4 lb.)
Rear acoustic door
17.2 kg (37.9 lb.)
144
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Front slimline door
17.2 kg (38 lb.)
Rear slimline door
9.1 kg (20 lb.)
Note:
1. Maximum total weight can be up to 255 kg (ESCALA PL 1650R-L+ lb.)
2. Can be shipped with up to six bulk power regulators and six bulk power distributors.
3. Each side cover consists of two panels.
Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment
DANGERHeavy equipment
mishandled. (D006)
personal injury or equipment damage might result if
You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning information
provided, with assistance from an authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery,
prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the
equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the
time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the
transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The
authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as
needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers
when you relocate or dispose of equipment.
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur in
line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power cords.
Phase currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table illustrates
phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power consumption, see Total
system power consumption.
Table 1. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA
Phase A Line Current
Phase B Line Current
Phase C Line
Current
1
Power / Vline
Power / Vline
0
2
0.5 Power / Vline
0.866 Power / Vline
0.5 Power /
Vline
3
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power /
Vline
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
145
Planning
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal
input voltage. Since total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power
number by two.
Balancing power panel loads
When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be fully
balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel loads,
while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of the three
phases will draw an equal amount of current, and will be, nominally, 57.8 percent of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three phases will carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from two
power panels in a way that balances the load among the three phases.
Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because GFI
circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.
Figure 1. Power panel load balancing
The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians may prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to balance
the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are alternated
with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.
Figure 2. Power panel load balancing
The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the three-pole
breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.
146
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
Figure 3. Power panel load balancing
Power cord configurations
The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure. For
raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and through the
same floor-tile cutout. For more information about raised-floor applications, refer to Cut and place floor panels
and Figure 1.
Figure 1. Single-frame system power cord configuration
Figure 2. Double-frame system power cord configuration
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
147
Planning
Dual power installation
The model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R configurations are designed with a fully redundant power
system. These systems have two power cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a fully
redundant power distribution system within the system. To take full advantage of the redundancy and
reliability that is built into the computer system, the system must be powered from two distribution panels. The
possible power installation configurations are described in Dual power installations.
Weight distribution
The following figure shows the floor loading dimensions for the model ESCALA PL 3250R, 9406-595, and
ESCALA PL 6450R. Use this figure in conjunction with the floor loading tables to determine the floor loading
for various configurations.
Figure 1. Floor loading dimensions
The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for the model ESCALA PL 3250R,
9406-595, and ESCALA PL 6450R. Weights include covers, width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 1. Floor loading for system with 2 processor books, 12 drawers, and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 2 processor
books, 12 drawers, and without integrated
battery backup
a (sides)
b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
25
2 frames
lb./ft2 kg/m2
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 198.6 969.6
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 158.3 772.9
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 133.2 650.4
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 159.8 780.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 128.5 627.6
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 109.0 532.4
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 133.0 649.4
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 108.0 527.1
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 92.3 450.8
148
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 115.1 562.0
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 94.2 459.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 81.2 396.3
Table 2. Floor loading for systems with 4 processor books, 4 drawers, and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for systems with 4 processor books, 4 drawers,
and without integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
kg/m2
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 223.3
1090.5
mm in. mm in. mm in.
25
2 frames
lb./ft2
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 177.3
865.8
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 148.6
725.7
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 151.2
738.3
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 121.9
ESCALA PL 6450R.3
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 103.7
506.2
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 114.9 ESCALA PL 1650R-L+.0
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 94.0
459.1
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 81.0
395.7
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 94.8
462.9
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 78.6
383.8
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 68.5
334.5
Table 3. Floor loading for system with 2 processor books, 10 drawers, and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 2 processor
books, 10 drawers, and with integrated
battery backup
a (sides)
b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
2 frames
lb./ft2 kg/m2
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 203.2 992.1
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 161.9 790.3
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 136.1 664.4
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 163.4 797.8
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 131.3 641.0
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 111.3 543.3
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 135.9 663.5
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 110.2 537.9
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 94.1 459.6
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 117.5 573.7
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 96.0 468.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 82.7 403.6
Table 4. Floor loading for system with 4 processor books, 2 drawers, and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 4 processor
books, 2 drawers, and with integrated battery
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
149
Planning
backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
25
2 frames
lb./ft2 kg/m2
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 232.5 1135.3
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 184.4 900.2
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 154.4 753.6
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 157.1 766.8
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 126.4 617.2
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 107.3 524.0
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 119.1 581.3
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 97.2
474.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 83.6
408.3
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 98.0
478.7
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.1
395.9
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 70.5
344.3
Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in Considerations
for multiple system installations.
Unit emergency power off
The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame). Refer to
the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.
Figure 1. Unit emergency power off figure
When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment. All volatile data will
be lost.
It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.
150
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
Planning
If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from the
system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on system
configuration.
Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries engage and the
computer continues to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine EPO. When
this is done, resetting the room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal battery
backup unit. In this event, all volatile data will be lost.
To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this connection is
made.
Figure 1. Computer room emergency power off figure
The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging into
the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the room
EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.
In the following figure, an AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For room
EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This connection
should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 61 m (200 ft.) of #24 AWG.
Figure 2. AMP connector figure
Machine holdup times
The following tables illustrate typical machine holdup times (time versus load) for fresh and aged batteries.
• All times are listed in minutes
• Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined)
Planning for model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R serverspecifications
151
Planning
• A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
• An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.
Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 1. Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Machine load
3.33 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
N
R
N
R
1 BPR
7.0
21.0
2.1
7.0
2 BPR
21.0 50.0
7.0
3 BPR
10 kW
13.33 kW
N
R
N
R
21.0
4.0
11.0
2.1
7.0
32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0
7.0
21.0
4.9
12.0
16.67 kW
20 kW
21.67 kW
N
R
N
R
N
R
3.2
9.5
2.1
7.0
1.7
6.5
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant
Table 2. Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine holdup time versus load for aged battery
Machine load
3.3 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
N
R
N
R
1 BPR
4.2
12.6
1.3
4.2
2 BPR
12.6 30.0
4.2
12.6
3 BPR
19.2 41.0
7.2
19.2
10 kW
N
13.33 kW
R
N
R
2.4
6.6
1.3
4.2
4.2
12.6
2.9
7.2
16.67 kW
20 kW
21.67 kW
N
R
N
R
N
R
1.9
5.7
1.3
4.2
1.0
3.9
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant
Model 14T/00 rack
Specifications for 14T/00 rack
Dimensions
Height
1804 mm (71.0
in.)
Capacity
36 usable EIA
units
Height with PDP - DC only
1926 mm (75.8
in.)
Width without side panels
152
Model 14T/00 rack
Planning
623 mm (24.5
in.)
Width with side panels
644 mm (25.4
in)
Depth with rear door only
1042 mm (41.0
in.)
Depth with rear door and front door 1098 mm (43.3
in.)
Depth with sculptured style front
door
1147 mm (45.2
in.)
Weight
Base rack (empty)
Full
rack1
244 kg (535 lb.)
816 kg (1795
lb.)
See 14T/00,
14T/42 and
0553 rack
weight
distribution and
floor loading
Electrical2
DC rack voltage (nominal)
(sum specified
values for
drawers or
enclosures in
rack)
-48 V dc
Power source loading maximum in See power cord
kVa3
options for an
0551 rack for
details
Voltage range (V dc)
-40 to -60
AC rack
683 Btu/hr
Power source loading maximum in
kVa (per PDB)4
Voltage range (V ac)
Frequency (Hz)
Temperature requirements
135 W
200 to 240
50 or 60
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Humidity requirements
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Noise emissions6
Rack noise
levels are a
function of the
number and
type of drawers
installed. See
server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Install or air flow
Model 14T/00 rack
153
Planning
Rack airflow
requirements
are a function
of the number
and type of
drawers
installed (see
Note 5). Refer
to the individual
drawer
specifications.
Service clearances
Front
915 mm (36 in.)
Back
Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight
plus the weight of the drawers mounted in
the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 35 lb. per EIA unit.
2. The total rack power should be derived from
the sum of the power used by the drawers
in the rack.
3. The power distribution panel (PDP) on the
DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen
(nine per power source) 48-volt, 20- to
50-amp circuit breakers (configuration
dependent). Each power source supports
up to 8.4 kVa.
4. Each ac power distribution bus (PDB) can
supply 4.8 kVa. A rack can have up to four
PDBs as required by the drawers mounted
in the rack.
5. All rack installations require careful site and
facilities planning designed to both address
the cumulative drawer heat output and
provide the airflow volume rates necessary
to comply with drawer temperature
requirements.
6. Acoustic doors are available for the racks.
Feature code 6248 is available for the 0551
and 14T/00 racks. Feature code 6249 is
available for the 0553 and 14T/42 racks.
The overall sound reduction is
approximately 6 dB. The doors add 381 mm
(15 in.) to the depth of the racks.
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack
This topic provides the detailed specifications for the 14T/42 and 0553 racks. For information on installing the
racks, see Installing the 7014-T00, 7014-T42, 0551, and 0553 racks. For information on installing additional
rack features, such as rack doors, heat exchanger doors, security kits, earthquake kits, multiple rack
attachment kits, status beacons, and latch brackets, see Installing rack features.
154
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack
Planning
Note: Before installing rear door heat exchangers on your 14T/42 rack, see Planning for the installation of
rear door heat exchangers.
Specifications for 14T/423 and 0553 rack
Dimensions
Height
2015 mm (79.3
in.)
Capacity
42 usable EIA
units
Height with PDP - DC only
Not applicable
Width without side panels
623 mm (24.5
in.)
Width with side panels
644 mm (25.4
in)
Depth with back door only
1042 mm (41.0
in.)
Depth with back door and front
door
1098 mm (43.3
in.)
Depth with sculptured style front
door
1147 mm (45.2
in.)
Weight
Base rack (empty)
Full
rack1
261 kg (575 lb.)
930 kg (2045
lb.)
See 14T/00,
14T/42 and
0553 rack
weight
distribution and
floor loading
Electrical2
DC rack voltage (nominal)
(sum specified
values for
drawers or
enclosures in
rack)
-48 V dc
Power source loading maximum in See power cord
kVa3
options for the
7014, 0551,
and 0553 racks
for details
Voltage range (V dc)
-40 to -60
AC rack
683 Btu/hr
Power source loading maximum in
kVa (per PDB)4
Voltage range (V ac)
Frequency (Hz)
Temperature requirements
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack
135 W
200 to 240
50 or 60
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
155
Planning
requirements
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Humidity requirements
Rack noise
levels are a
function of the
number and
type of drawers
installed. See
server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Noise emissions4
Install or air flow
Rack airflow
requirements
are a function
of the number
and type of
drawers
installed (see
Note 5). Refer
to the individual
drawer
specifications.
Service clearances2
Front
915 mm (36 in.)
Back
Sides
915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight
plus the weight of the drawers mounted in
the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 35 lb. per EIA unit.
2. Recommended minimum vertical service
clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft.)
3. When installing a model ESCALA PL
850R/PL 1650R/R+ or 9406-570 in a
14T/42 rack, there are restrictions to what
height the rack installation can begin so that
SMP and FSP flex assemblies are
accommodated. The installation
configurations are as follows:
♦ 16-way configurations (16U) start
installation between EIA 1 through
EIA 21
♦ 12-way configurations (12U) start
installation between EIA 1 though
EIA 25
♦ 8-way configurations (8U) start
installation between EIA 1 through
EIA 29
♦ 4-way configurations (4U) start
installation between EIA 1 through
EIA 37, EIA 37 through 39 (does
not use SMP or SMP flex
assemblies)
Associated I/O platforms can be mounted in
the upper locations of the rack.
156
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack
Planning
4. Acoustic doors are available for the racks.
Feature code 6248 is available for the 0551
and 14T/00 racks. Feature code 6249 is
available for the 0553 and 14T/42 racks.
The overall sound reduction is
approximately 6 dB. The doors add 381 mm
(15 in.) to the depth of the racks.
5. All rack installations require careful site and
facilities planning designed to address both
the cumulative drawer heat output and
provide the airflow volume rates necessary
to comply with drawer temperature
requirements.
Caster and leveler locations
The following diagram provides the caster and leveler locations for the 14T/00, 14T/42, 0551, and 0553 racks.
Figure 1. Caster and leveler locations
Hardware specification sheets
Select the appropriate category for a list of available hardware specification sheets.
Tip: Print the specification tables for all of your equipment. You will need this information several times during
the planning process.
• Expansion units and migration towers
• Racks
• Hardware management consoles
• Uninterruptible power supply
• Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 racks
Model 14T/42 and 0553 rack
157
Planning
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers
Select a model to view its specifications.
Expansion units and migration towers
• 7031-D24 and 7031-T24 expansion unit
• 11D/11 expansion unit
• 11D/20 expansion unit
D24, T24 expansion units
Specifications for the D24, T24 expansion units
Dimensions for
rack-mounted expansion
unit
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
447 mm
660 mm
171 mm
English
17.5 in.
26 in.
6.75 in.
Width
Depth
Height
Metric
305 mm
655 mm
508 mm
English
12.0 in.
26.0 in.
20.0 in.
Dimensions for desk-side
expansion unit with
stabilizer foot and
decorative covers
Maximum configuration weight (rack-mounted)
54 kg (120 lb.)
Maximum configuration weight (desk-side)
66 kg (145 lb.)
Electrical
kVA (maximum)
0.740
Rated voltage and frequency
100-127 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 3 Hz and 12 A
200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 3 Hz and 6.2
A
Machine rating with two redundant power cords
Thermal output (maximum)
4232 Btu/hr
Power requirements (maximum)
700 W
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current
55 A per power cord
Leakage current (maximum)
3.10 mA
Phase
1
Plug type (Canada and U.S.)
2, 4, 5, 6, 10 (for 57/86 and 57/87 only), 18, 19, 22,
23, 24, 25, 32, 34 (for 57/86 and 57/87 only), 57,
59, 62, 66, 69, 70, 73, 75, 76
Power cord length
1.8 m (6 ft. ) (U.S. only) or 4.3 m (14 ft. )
Temperature requirements
Operating
158
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers
Planning
10 degrees to 38 degrees C (50 degrees to 100.4
degrees F)3
Nonoperating
-40 degrees to 60 degrees C (-40 degrees to 140
degrees F)
Environmental requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity
20 to 80% (allowable)
8 to 80%
(including
condensing)
40 to 55% (recommended)
Wet bulb temperature
21 degrees C (69.8 degrees F)
Maximum altitude
Noise
27 degrees C
(80.6 degrees F)
2134 m (7000 ft.) above sea level
emissions1, 4
Operating
Idle
Single 57/86 or D24
LWAd
drawer in standard
LpAm (1-meter bystander)
19-inch rack with 24 hard
drives, nominal
environmental conditions,
and no front or rear doors
on rack.
6.6 bels
6.5 bels
49 dB
49 dB
57/87 or T24 tower with
24 hard drives, and
nominal environmental
conditions.
6.6 bels
6.5 bels
47 dB
47 dB
Top2
LWAd
LpAm (1-meter bystander)
Service clearances
Service clearances for rack-mounted expansion unit
Front
Back
Sides2
914 mm
914 mm
914 mm
36 in.
36 in.
36 in.
Service clearances for desk-side expansion unit
Front
Back
368.3 mm
381 mm
14.5 in.
15 in.
Sides
Top
Notes:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Side and top clearances are optional during operation.
3. The maximum 38 degree C (100.4 degree F) temperature must be derated 1 degree C (1.8
degrees F) per 137 m (450 ft.) above 1295 m (4250 ft.). Maximum altitude is 2134 m (7000 ft.).
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO
9296.
11D/11 expansion unit
Specifications for 11D/11 expansion unit
Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
Metric
168 mm
221 mm
711 mm
English
6.6 in.
8.7 in.
28.0 in.
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers
159
Planning
11D/11
Maximum configuration
weight
Two 11D/11 with drawer
enclosure
16.8 kg (37 lb.)
39.1 kg (86 lb.)
Electrical
0.211
0.421
200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or minus 0.5 Hz
200-240 V ac at 50-60 plus or
minus 0.5 Hz
683 Btu/hr1
1366 Btu/hr1
200 W1
400 W1
kVA
Rated voltage and
frequency
Thermal output (maximum)
Power requirements
(maximum)
Power factor
0.951
Inrush current per 11D/11
71 A1
Leakage current (maximum)
3 mA1
Phase
1
Plug type (Canada and
U.S.)
5, 10, 34
Power cord length (U.S.
only)
1.8 m (6 ft.) 2.7 m (9 ft.)
Temperature requirements
Operating
10 degrees to 38 degrees C (50 degrees to 100.4 degrees F)
Nonoperating
1 degree to 60 degrees C (33.8 degrees to 140 degrees F)
Environment requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
Noncondensing humidity
8% to 80%
8% to 80%
23 degrees C (73.4 degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6 degrees F)
Wet bulb temperature
Maximum altitude
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Noise emissions (one
11D/11 unit) 1
LWAd
<LpA>m
Operating
Idle
5.6 bels
5.6 bels
40 dB
40 dB
Service clearances
Front
Back
Sides
Top
915 mm
915 mm
915 mm
915 mm
36 in.
36 in.
36 in.
36 in.
Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
For information about floor loading, please contact your service or Installation Planning representative.
Because the thickness of the covers are negligible, the height, width, and depth of the overall dimensions may
be used in floor loading calculations.
Plug and receptacle type 34
160
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers
Planning
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Manufacturer's Number Russel/Stoll
Plug 3720U-2
Connector 3913U-2 (DuraGard 9C23U2)
Receptacle 3743U-2 (DuraGard
9R23U2W)
Type 34 250V 10A/15A Water
Resistant
Canada, Japan, United States
Cord Feature
Part Number
Cord Rating
6498 (M) (J)
73F4931 - 1.8 m (6 ft.)
(M)
2.4 kVA cord (M)
Systems and expansion units
(M) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ and expansion
units used with server, 57/86, 57/87, D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
11D/20 expansion unit
Specifications for 11D/20 expansion unit
Dimensions Height
Width
Depth
Metric
178 mm
445 mm
610 mm
English
7.0 in.
17.5 in.
24.0 in.
Maximum
configuration weight
45.9 kg (101 lb.)
Electrical
11D/20
kVA
Rated voltage and
frequency
0.358
100-240 V ac at 50-60 Hz, V dc not supported
Thermal output
(typical)
775 Btu/hr
Thermal output
(maximum)
1161 Btu/hr
Power requirements
(typical)
227 W
Power requirements
(maximum)
340 W
Specifications for expansion units and migration towers
161
Planning
Power factor
0.95
Inrush current per
11D/202
60 A
Temperature requirements3
Operating
5 degrees to 35 degrees C (41 to 95 degrees F)
Nonoperating
1 degrees to 60 degrees C (33.8 to 140 degrees F)
Storage
1 degrees to 60 degrees C (33.8 to 140 degrees F)
Environment
requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
Noncondensing
humidity
8% to 80%
8% to 80%
5% to 80 %
23 degrees C (73.4
degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6 degrees
F)
29 degrees C (84.2
degrees F)
Wet bulb
temperature4
Maximum altitude3, 4
Noise emissions
1
LWAd
<LpA>m
Storage
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Operating
Idle
6.2 bels
6.1 bels
44 dB
43 dB
Service clearances**
Front
Back
Sides
915 mm
915 mm
915 mm
36 in.
36 in.
36 in.
Note:
1. For a description of noise emission values, see Acoustics.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power, no inrush occurs during normal power off-on
cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 degree C per 137 m (450 ft.) above
915 m (3000 ft.).
4. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 degree C per 274 m (900 ft.) above
305 m (1000 ft.).
Rack specifications
This topic provides specifications for the following racks.
• 05/54 rack
• 05/55 rack
• 57/92 expansion rack
• 14S/11 rack
• 14S/25 rack
• 14T/00 rack
• 14T/42 rack
162
Rack specifications
Planning
Model 14S/11 rack
This topic provides the detailed specifications for the 14S/11 racks. For information on installing the racks, see
Installing the 14S/11 racks. For information on installing additional rack features, such as rack doors, heat
exchanger doors, security kits, earthquake kits, multiple rack attachment kits, status beacons, and latch
brackets, see Installing rack features.
Specifications for 14S/11 rack
Dimensions
Height
611 mm (24 in.)
Capacity
11 usable EIA
units
Height with PDP - DC only
Not applicable
Width without side panels
Not applicable
Width with side panels
518 mm (20.4
in.)
Depth without doors
820 mm (32.3
in.)
Depth with front door
873 mm (34.4
in.)
Depth with sculptured style front
door
Not applicable
Weight
Base rack (empty)
Full
rack1
36 kg (80 lb.)
218 kg (481 lb.)
Electrical3
(sum specified
values for
drawers or
enclosures in
rack)
DC rack voltage (nominal)
Not applicable
Power source loading maximum in
kVa
Not applicable
Voltage range (V dc)
Not applicable
AC rack
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Power source loading maximum in
kVa (per PDU)
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Voltage range (V ac)
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Frequency (Hz)
Temperature requirements
Rack specifications
50 or 60
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
163
Planning
requirements
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Humidity requirements
Rack noise
levels are a
function of the
number and
type of drawers
installed. See
server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Noise emissions
Install or air flow
Rack airflow
requirements
are a function
of the number
and type of
drawers
installed (see
Note 5). Refer
to the individual
drawer
specifications.
Service clearances2
Front
915 mm (36 in.)
Back
Sides
254 mm (10 in.) 71 mm (2.8 in.)
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight
plus the weight of the drawers mounted in
the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 15.9 kg (35 lb.) per EIA
unit.
2. Recommended minimum vertical service
clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft.).
3. The 7188 power distribution unit used with
this rack is mounted horizontally and
requires one EIA unit of space.
Model 14S/11 rack operational clearances
Model 05/54 and 14S/11 with stabilizer bar
164
Rack specifications
Planning
Model 05/54 and 14S/11 plan view
Model 05/54 and 14S/11 caster locations
Model 14S/25 rack
This topic provides the detailed specifications for the 14S/25 racks. For information on installing the racks, see
Installing the 14S/25 racks. For information on installing additional rack features, such as rack doors, heat
exchanger doors, security kits, earthquake kits, multiple rack attachment kits, status beacons, and latch
brackets, see Installing rack features.
Specifications for 14S/25 rack
Dimensions
Height
1240 mm (49
in.)
Capacity
25 usable EIA
units
Height with PDP - DC only
Not applicable
Width without side panels
590 mm (23.2
in.)
Width with side panels
610 mm (24 in)
Depth with back door only
996 mm (39.2
in.)
Depth with back door and front
door
1000 mm (39.4
in.)
Depth with sculptured style front
door
Not applicable
Weight
Base rack (empty)
Full
rack1
Rack specifications
98 kg (217 lb.)
665 kg (1467
lb.)
165
Planning
Electrical3
(sum specified
values for
drawers or
enclosures in
rack)
DC rack voltage (nominal)
Not applicable
Power source loading maximum in
kVa
Not applicable
Voltage range (V dc)
Not applicable
AC rack
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Power source loading maximum in
kVa (per PDU)
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Voltage range (V ac)
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Frequency (Hz)
50 or 60
Temperature requirements
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Humidity requirements
See server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Rack noise
levels are a
function of the
number and
type of drawers
installed. See
server or
hardware
specifications
for specific
requirements
Noise emissions
Install or air flow
Rack airflow
requirements
are a function
of the number
and type of
drawers
installed (see
Note 5). Refer
to the individual
drawer
specifications.
Service clearances2
Front
915 mm (36 in.)
166
Back
Sides
760 mm (30 in.) 915 mm (36 in.)
Rack specifications
Planning
Note:
1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight
plus the weight of the drawers mounted in
the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 22.7 kg (50 lb.) per EIA
unit.
2. Recommended minimum vertical service
clearance from floor is 2439 mm (8 ft.).
3. The 7188 power distribution unit used with
this rack is mounted horizontally and
requires one EIA unit of space.
Model 14S/25 rack operational clearances
Model 05/55 and 14S/25 with stabilizer foot
Model 05/55 and 14S/25 plan view
Rack specifications
167
Planning
Model 05/55 and 14S/25 caster locations
Planning for 57/92 base rack
This topic gives you a thorough understanding of the 57/92 rack specifications, including dimensions,
electrical, power, temperature, environment, and service clearances. You will also find links to more detailed
information, such as compatible hardware and plug types.
The 57/92 base rack is an optional second base frame with its own separate connection to AC power that is
designed for use with the model ESCALA PL 3250R and ESCALA PL 6450R. A complete set of planning
information is provided to address the resulting system.
The 57/92 consists of multiple components, as summarized in the following table.
Table 1. 57/92 base rack components
Model
Description
Minimum per Maximum per
system
system
FC6251
Slimline door set for primary rack (front
and rear) See Doors and covers.
1
2
FC6252
Acoustic door set for primary rack (front
and rear) See Doors and covers.
1
2
FC8691
Optional expansion frame (16-way and
32-way only)
0
1
Various
Hardware Management Console
(HMC)3
01
21
7040-61D (ESCALA PL 3250R and
ESCALA PL 6450R), 57/91 and
57/94
Optional I/O drawer (20 PCI cards
max., 16 disk drives max.)
0
122
FC6200 or FC6201
Optional integrated battery backup
feature
0
6
Note:
1. A Hardware Management Console can connect to multiple systems (therefore, a Hardware
Management Console may not need to be ordered), or up to two HMCs can connect to the system
168
Rack specifications
Planning
for redundancy.
2. A maximum of 12 I/O drawers can be connected to a single ESCALA PL 3250R or ESCALA PL
6450R frame. Typically, I/O drawers are populated in the server frame first, which reduces the
maximum number of drawers available in the 57/92 frame.
3. For the 57/92 base rack, a Hardware Management Console must be provided within the same room
and within 8 m (26 ft.) of the server.
Table 2. Specifications for 57/92 base rack
Specifications for 57/92 base rack
Plan views
Top down views
ASHRAE declarations (heat load data for various configurations)
Dimensions and weight
Physical Characteristic
Height
Width
Depth
Weight - Maximum Configuration4
Slimline doors
Acoustical doors
1 Frame
2 Frames
1 Frame
2 Frames
2025 mm (79.7
in.)
2025 mm (79.7 in.)
2025 mm
(79.7 in.)
2025 mm
(79.7 in.)
785 mm (30.9 in.) 1575 mm (62.0 in.)
785 mm
(30.9 in.)
1575 mm
(62.0 in.)
1326 mm (52.2 in.)
1681 mm
(66.2 in.)
1681 mm
(66.2 in.)
1264 kg (2786 lb.) 2659 kg (5863 lb.)
1273 kg
(2806 lb.)
2677 kg
(5901 lb.)
1326 mm (52.2
in.)
Shipping dimensions and weight
Height
2311 mm (91 in.)
Width
940 mm (37 in.)
Depth
1511 mm (59.5 in.)
Weight
Varies by configuration
Electrical and thermal characteristics (3-phase)
Rated voltage and frequency (3 phase)
Rated current, power cord with 100 A plug FC 8686 or 8687
(amps per phase)
Rated current, power cord with 60 A plug, FC 8688 or 8689
(amps per phase)
200 to 240 V ac at 380 to 415 V 480 V ac
50 to 60 Hz
ac at 50 to at 50 to
60 Hz
60 Hz
60
32
24
32
24
21.4 kW
21.4 kW
0.97
0.93
73 kBtu/hr
73
kBtu/hr
48
Rated current, all other power cords (amps per phase)
Maximum power
Power factor, typical
21.4 kW
0.99
Inrush current (maximum)3
Thermal output
163 A
73 kBtu/hr
Dual power feature code
Standard
Branch circuit breaker and cord information
See Breaker rating and
cord information
Power cord length
4.2 m (14 ft.) - all
locations (except
Chicago)
Rack specifications
169
Planning
1.8 m (6 ft.) - United
States (Chicago)
Environment specifications
Recommended operating temperature
10 degrees to 32
degrees C (50 degrees
to 89.6 degrees F)
Nonoperating temperature (All models)
10 degrees to 43
degrees C (50 degrees
to 109.4 degrees F)
Storage temperature (All models)
1 degree to 60 degrees
C (33.8 degrees to 140
degrees F)
Shipping temperature (All models)
-40 degrees to 60
degrees C (-40
degrees to 140
degrees F)
Maximum wet bulb
Noncondensing relative humidity
Storage3
Operating
Nonoperating
23 degrees C
(73.4 degrees F)
27 degrees C (80.6 29 degrees
degrees F)
C (84.2
degrees F)
8 to 80 %
Maximum altitude3
8 to 80 %
5 to 80 %
Shipping3
29
degrees
C (84.2
degrees
F)
5 to 100
%
3048 m (10000 ft.)
Acoustical noise emissions1, 5, 6
LWAd (Bels) 5
Product Configuration
LpAM (dB)5
(bystander, 1 m)
Operating
Idle
Operating
Idle
Single, typical I/O drawer in rack, nominal
conditions, slimline door set
7.5
7.5
60
60
Single, typical I/O drawer in rack, nominal
conditions, acoustical door set
6.8
6.8
53
53
Single, typical I/O drawer in rack plus bulk
power unit, nominal conditions, slimline
door set
7.8
7.8
62
62
Single, typical I/O drawer in rack plus bulk
power unit, nominal conditions, acoustical
door set
7.1
7.1
55
55
Service clearances
For a graphical representation of service clearances, see Service clearances
Seismic considerations: See Secure the rack
Data communications
Electromagnetic compatibility compliance: This server meets the following electromagnetic compatibility
specifications: FCC (CFR 47, Part 15); VCCI; CISPR-22; 89/336/EEC; BSMI (A2/NZS 3548:1995); C-Tick;
ICES/NMB-003; Korean EMI/EMC (MIC Notice 2000 94, Notice 2000 72); People's Republic of China
Commodity Inspection Law
Safety compliance: This server is designed and certified to meet the following safety standards: UL 60950-1;
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN 60950-1; IEC 60950-1 including all national differences
Note:
1. Noise levels are only reported for the base machine type.
2. Inrush currents occur only at initial application of power (short duration for charging capacitors). No
inrush occurs during normal power off-on cycle.
3. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 degree C (1.8 degrees F) per 219 m
(719 ft.) above 1295 m (4250 ft.). Maximum altitude is 3048 m (10000 ft.).
170
Rack specifications
Planning
4. For specific configuration weights, see Approximate system weights by configuration
5. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound level; LpAM is the mean A-weighted sound pressure
measured at the 1-meter bystander postions; 1 B = 10 dB.
6. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with 9296.
To effectively plan for the 57/92, information on the following topics is also provided:
• Breaker rating and cord information
• Power cord features
• Doors and covers
• Plan views
• Raised-floor requirements and preparation
• Cut and place floor panels
• Secure the rack
• Position the rack
• Install the frame tie-down kit
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
• Considerations for multiple system installations
• Service clearances
• Total system power consumption
• Cooling requirements
• Moving the system to the installation site
• Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
• Balancing power panel loads
• Power cord configuration
• Dual power installation
• Approximate system weights by configuration
• Weight distribution
• Unit emergency power off
• Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
• Machine holdup times
Front-service access is necessary on the 57/92 to accommodate a lift tool for the servicing of large drawers
(I/O drawers). Front and rear service access is necessary to accommodate the lift tool for servicing of the
optional integrated battery backup.
Figure 1. Floor plan considerations for single units
Doors and covers
Covers are an integral part of the 57/92 and are required for product safety and electromagnetic compatibility
compliance. The following rear door options are available for the 57/92:
• Enhanced acoustical cover option
Rack specifications
171
Planning
This feature provides a low-noise option for customers or sites with stringent acoustical requirements
and where a minimal system footprint is not critical. The acoustical cover option consists of a special
front and rear doors which are approximately 250 mm (10 in.) deep and contain acoustical treatment
that lowers the noise level of the machine by approximately 7 dB (0.7 B) compared to the slimline
doors. This reduction in noise emission levels means that the noise level of a single 57/92 with
slimline covers is about the same as the noise level of five model 57/92 systems with acoustical
covers.
• Slimline cover option
This feature provides a smaller-footprint and lower-cost option for customers or sites where space is
more critical than acoustical noise levels. The slimline cover option consists of a front door, which is
approximately 100 mm (4 in) deep, and a rear door, which is approximately 50 mm (2 in) deep. No
acoustical treatment is available for this option.
Note: For declared levels of acoustical noise emissions, refer to Table 2.
Plan views
The following figure shows dimensional planning information for systems with acoustical doors.
Figure 1. Plan view for single-frame systems with slimline doors and acoustical doors
Figure 2. Plan view for double-frame systems with slimline doors and acoustical doors
Attention: When moving the rack, note the caster swivel diameters shown in the following figure. Each caster
swivels in an approximate 130 mm (5.1 inch) diameter.
172
Rack specifications
Planning
Figure 3. Leveling foot and frame dimensions
ASHRAE declarations
The following table and figures show the measurement reporting requirements as defined in the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Thermal Guidelines for Data
Processing Environments, which is available at http://tc99.ashraetcs.org .
Table 1. ASHRAE declarations
Typical Heat Release
Airflow
nominal1
Airflow
maximum1 at 35
Weight
degrees C (95
degrees F)
Overall
system
dimensions
Description
watts
cfm
m3/hr
cfm
m3/hr
Minimum configuration
1500
410
697
580
985
See 57/92
See 57/92
Maximum configuration
14400
2060
2990
2560
373876
See 57/92
See 57/92
Typical configuration
6200
1010
1716
1300
2209
See 57/92
See 57/92
ASHRAE Class
3
Minimum configuration One I/O drawer
Maximum configuration 12 I/O drawers
Typical configuration
5 I/O drawers
Note:
1. Airflow for the typical and minimum configurations do not include redundant power supply, feature
code 5158.
Rack specifications
173
Planning
Figure 1. Airflow figure for server mounted in a rack
Breaker rating and cord information
The following table provides the recommended circuit breaker ratings.
Table 1. Breaker rating and cord information
Voltage (Phase to phase)
Circuit breaker rating
200-240 V
200-240 V
60 A (60 A plug) or 80 A (100 A plug)
63 A (No plug)
380-415 V 480 V
30 A
32 A
Note:
1. The exact circuit breaker ratings may not be available in all countries. Where the specified
circuit breaker ratings are not acceptable, use the nearest available rating. These
recommendations are based on a maximum configuration running in "n-mode."
2. The supplier strongly recommends the use of a metal backbox with power cords using
IEC-309 plugs.
Service clearances
The minimum service clearance for systems with slimline doors is shown in the following figure.
Figure 1. Service clearances for system with slimline doors
174
Rack specifications
Planning
Figure 2. Service clearances for single-frame systems with slimline doors (with alternative right-side service
clearance)
Figure 3. Service clearances for double-frame systems with slimline doors
The minimum service clearance for systems with acoustical doors is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4. Service clearances for single-frame system with acoustical doors
Rack specifications
175
Planning
Figure 5. Service clearances for single-frame system with acoustical doors (with alternative right side service
clearance)
Figure 6. Service clearances for double-frame system with acoustical doors
Refer to the figure in Raised-floor requirements and preparation for service clearances shown in a raised-floor
installation.
Approximate system weights by configuration
176
Rack specifications
Planning
Table 1. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with acoustic
doors
Number of I/O drawers
System weight - kg (lb.) A-frame weight - kg (lb.)
1
549 (1211)
549 (1211)
2
649 (1431)
649 (1431)
3
749 (1651)
749 (1651)
4
852 (1878)
852 (1878)
5
952 (2098)
952 (2098)
6
1051 (2318)
1051 (2318)
7
1173 (2586)
1173 (2586)
8
1273 (2806)
1273 (2806)
9
1680 (3704)
1254 (2765)
10
1780 (3924)
1255 (2767)
11
1880 (4144)
1256 (2769)
12
1980 (4364)
1257 (2771)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor
books in the server frame.
Table 2. Approximate system weight by configuration with integrated battery backup and with acoustic doors
Number of I/O drawers
System weight - kg (lb.) A-frame weight - kg (lb.)
1
640 (1410)
640 (1410)
2
739 (1630)
739 (1630)
3
839 (1850)
839 (1850)
4
942 (2077)
942 (2077)
5
1042 (2297)
1042 (2297)
6
1142 (2517)
1142 (2517)
7
1658 (3655)
1143 (2519)
8
1758 (3875)
1144 (2521)
9
1861 (4102)
1148 (2530)
10
1960 (4322)
1149 (2534)
11
2060 (4542)
1149 (2534)
12
2159 (4760)
1149 (2534)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor
books in the server frame.
Rack specifications
177
Planning
Table 3. Approximate system weight by configuration without integrated battery backup and with slimline
doors
Number of I/O drawers
System weight - kg (lb.) A-frame weight - kg (lb.)
1
541 (1192)
541 (1192)
2
641 (1412)
641 (1412)
3
740 (1632)
740 (1632)
4
843 (1859)
843 (1859)
5
943 (2079)
943 (2079)
6
1043 (2299)
1043 (2299)
7
1164 (2567)
1164 (2567)
8
1264 (2787)
1264 (2787)
9
1672 (3685)
1246 (2746)
10
1771 (3905)
1247 (2750)
11
1871 (4125)
1247 (2750)
12
1971 (4345)
1248 (2752)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor
books in the server frame.
Table 4. Approximate system weight by configuration with integrated battery backup and with slimline doors
Number of I/O drawers
System weight - kg (lb.) A-frame weight - kg (lb.)
1
631 (1391)
631 (1391)
2
731 (1611)
731 (1611)
3
831 (1831)
831 (1831)
4
934 (2058)
934 (2058)
5
1033 (2278)
1033 (2278)
6
1133 (2498)
1133 (2498)
7
1649 (3636)
1134 (2500)
8
1749 (3856)
1135 (2502)
9
1842 (4083)
1139 (2511)
10
1952 (4303)
1141 (2515)
11
2052 (4523)
1141 (2515)
12
2151 (4741)
1141 (2515)
Note:
1. I/O drawers are populated based on the number of processor
books in the server frame.
178
Rack specifications
Planning
Power cord features
The following three-phase power cord features are available for the 57/92:
Table 1. Power cord features
Supply type
Two redundant
three-phase power
cords
Nominal voltage
range (V ac)
Voltage tolerance (V
ac)
Frequency range (Hz)
200-480
180-509
47-63
Feature code
Description
8697
Power cord, 8
AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
8698
Power cord, 8
AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft.)
8688
Power cord, 6
AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
8689
Power cord, 6
AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft.)
8686
Power cord, 6
AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
Voltage (V ac)
Plug
480
IEC309 30 A plug
IEC309 Type
430R7W
200-240
IEC309 60 A plug
IEC309 Type
460R9W
200-240
IEC309 100 A plug
IEC309 Type
4100R9W
8687
Power cord, 6
AWG, 1.8 m (6 ft.)
86941
Power cord, 6
AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
200-240
86771
Power cord, 8
AWG, 4.3 m (14 ft.)
380-415
Customer receptacle
(not provided)
Not provided
Note:
1. These power cords are shipped without a plug or receptacle. An electrician may be required to install
the plug and receptacle to meet applicable country or region electrical codes.
Raised-floor requirements and preparation
A raised-floor is required for the 57/92 to ensure optimal performance and to comply with electromagnetic
compatibility requirements. It will also provide optimum system cooling and cable management. Raised-floor
cutouts should be protected by electrically nonconductive molding, appropriately sized, with edges treated to
prevent cable damage and to prevent casters from rolling into the floor cutouts.
Rack specifications
179
Planning
Cut and place floor panels
This section provides recommendations for making the necessary openings in the raised floor for installing the
57/92.
The x-y alphanumeric grid positions are used to identify relative positions of cutout floor panels that may be
cut in advance.
1. Measure the panel size of the raised floor.
2. Verify the floor panel size. The floor panel size illustrated is 600 mm (23.6 in.) and 610 mm (24 in.)
panels.
3. Ensure adequate floor space is available to place the frames over the floor panels exactly as shown in
the figure. For front-to-back and side-to-side clearances, refer to Considerations for multiple system
installations. Use the plan view, if necessary. Consider all obstructions above and below the floor.
4. Identify the panels needed, and list the total quantity of each panel required for the installation.
5. Cut the required quantity of panels. When cutting the panels, you must adjust the size of the cut for
the thickness of the edge molding you are using. The dimensions shown in the figures are finished
dimensions. For ease of installation, number each panel as it is cut, as shown in the following figure.
Note: Depending on the panel type, additional panel support (pedestals) may be required to restore
structural integrity of the panel. Consult the panel manufacturer to ensure that the panel can sustain a
concentrated load of 476 kg (1050 lb). For multiple frame installation, it is possible that two casters
will produce loads as high as 953 kg (2100 lb).
6. Use Figure 1 to install the panels in the proper positions.
Note:
a. This floor-tile arrangement is recommended so that the castors or leveling pads are placed on
separate floor tiles to minimize the weight on a single floor tile. Furthermore, we recommend
that the tiles bearing the weight (having castors or leveling pads on the tiles) should be uncut
to retain the strength of the floor tile.
b. The following figure is intended only to show relative positions and accurate dimensions of
floor cutouts. The figure is not intended to be a machine template and is not drawn to scale.
Figure 1. Raised floor with 610 mm (24 in.) floor panels figure
180
Rack specifications
Planning
Note: This figure shows a dual frame configuration. If your installation uses a single frame configuration, use
the dimensions associated with the primary frame.
Secure the rack
Note: Securing the rack is an optional procedure. See Vibration and shock for more information.
The following can be ordered by the customer as additional rack-securing options for the 57/92.
• RPQ 8A1183 for attaching the rack-mounting plates to the concrete floor (nonraised floor)
• RPQ 8A1185 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 228.6 mm to 330.2
mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth)
• RPQ 8A1186 to attach the rack to a concrete floor when server is on a raised floor 304.8 mm to 558.8
mm (12 in. to 22 in. depth)
Before the service representative can perform the tie-down procedure you must complete the floor preparation
described in Cut and place floor panels and the procedures described in Attach the rack to a concrete
(nonraised) floor or Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor.
Position the rack
Rack specifications
181
Planning
To unpack and position the rack, do the following:
Note: See Moving the system to the installation site before attempting to position the rack.
1. Remove all packing and tape from the rack.
2. Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in the front of the final installation location.
3. Position the rack according to the customer floor plan.
4. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the thumbscrew on the caster.
Figure 1. Caster thumbscrew
5. While moving the system to its final installed location and during relocation, it may be necessary to lay
down floor covering, such as Lexan sheets, to prevent floor panel damage.
Install the frame tie-down kit
The following procedures describe how to install a frame tie down kit and floor tie down hardware to secure an
rack to a concrete floor beneath a 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in. depth) or a 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm
(12 in. to 22 in. depth) raised-floor environment or to a nonraised floor.
• Position the rack
• Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
• Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete (nonraised) floor. It is the customer's responsibility to
ensure the following steps are completed before the service representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: The customer should obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate
anchoring of the mounting plates. A minimum of three anchor bolts for each mounting plate must be used to
secure the plates to the concrete floor. Because some of the drilled holes may be aligned with concrete
reinforcement rods below the surface of the concrete floor, additional holes must be drilled. Each mounting
plate must have at least three usable holes, two that are on opposite sides and opposite ends of each other,
and one hole at the center. The mounting plates should be able to withstand 1134 kg (2500 lb.) of pulling
force on each end.
1. Be sure the rack is in the correct location. To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the
diagonal distance of the center of the holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between
the center holes to the center of the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side-to-side
182
Rack specifications
Planning
distance) and 1019 mm (40.1 in.) (the front-to-back distance).
Figure 1. Rack tie down (nonraised floor)
2. Place the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1), front and back, in the approximate mounting position
under the system rack.
3. To align the mounting plates to the system rack, do the following:
a. Place the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) through the plate assembly holes at
the bottom of the rack. Install the bushings and washers (item 4 and 5 in Figure 1) to ensure
bolt positioning.
Note: The plastic bushing is intended to provide electrical insulation between the frame and
the ground. When such insulation is not required, the plastic bushing does not need to be
installed.
b. Position the mounting plates (item 1 in Figure 1) under the four rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in
Figure 1) so that the mounting bolts are centered directly over the tapped holes.
c. Turn the rack-mounting bolts (item 6 in Figure 1) three or four rotations into the tapped holes.
4. Mark the floor around the edge of the mounting plates, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2. Mark floor around edge of mounting plates
5. Remove the mounting bolts from the threaded holes.
6. Move the rack away from the mounting plates.
7. Mark the floor at the center of each hole in the mounting plate (including tapped holes).
8. Remove the mounting plates from the marked locations.
Rack specifications
183
Planning
9. At the marked location of the tapped mounting holes, drill two holes approximately 19 mm (.75 in.) to
allow clearance for the ends of the two rack-mounting bolts. The ends of the rack-mounting bolts may
protrude past the thickness of the mounting plate. Drill one hole in each group of anchor bolt location
marks as indicated on the marked floor.
10. Using at least five heavy duty concrete anchoring bolts for each mounting plate, mount the mounting
plates to the concrete floor.
Attach the rack to a short- or long-raised floor
Attention: The frame tie downs are intended to secure a frame weighing less than 1429 kg (3150 lb.). These
tie downs are designed to secure the frame on a raised floor installation.
Use the following to determine your next step:
1. If the rack is being attached to a short depth raised floor environment 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to
13 in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102) described in the following
table.
Table 1. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.) Raised
Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1102)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P2999
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
2. If the rack is being attached to a deep raised floor environment 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22
in. depth) install the Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103) described in the following
table.
Table 2. Raised Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.) Raised
Floor Tie Down Kit (Part number 16R1103)
Item Part Number Quantity Description
1
44P3438
1
Wrench
2
44P2996
2
Stabilizer bar
3
44P3000
4
Turnbuckle Assembly
It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the following steps are completed before the service
representative performs the tie-down procedure.
Note: To accommodate a floor with a depth of more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or a steel channel
adapter for mounting the subfloor eyebolts are required. The customer must supply the floor eyebolts.
184
Rack specifications
Planning
Consider the following when preparing the floor for tie-down:
• The hardware is designed to support a frame weighing no more than 1578.5 kg (3480 lb.).
• The estimated maximum concentrated load on one caster for a 1578.5 kg (3480 lb.)-system is 526.2
kg (1160 lb.). For a multiple system installation, it is possible that one floor tile will bear a total
concentrated load of 1052.3 kg (2320 lb.).
To install the eyebolts, do the following:
1. Obtain the service of a qualified structural engineer to determine appropriate installation of the
eyebolts.
2. Consider the following before installing the eyebolts:
♦ Floor eyebolts must be securely anchored to the concrete floor.
♦ For a single frame installation, four 1/2-in. diameter by 13-inch subfloor eyebolts should be
secured to the subfloor.
♦ The minimum height of the center of the internal diameter is 2.54 mm (1 in.) above the
concrete floor surface.
♦ The maximum height is 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) above the concrete floor surface. A height greater
than 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) can cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie-down hardware.
♦ The eyebolt's internal diameter should be 1-3/16 inch, and each eyebolt should be able to
withstand 1224.7 kg (2700 lb). The customer should obtain the service of a qualified
consultant or structural engineer to determine the appropriate anchoring method for these
eyebolts and to ensure that the raised floor can support the floor-loading specifications.
♦ To ensure that the holes are in the correct location, the diagonal distance of the center of the
holes should be 1211.2 mm (47.7 in.). The distance between the center holes to the center of
the next holes should be 654.8 mm (25.8 in.) (the side to side distance) and 1019 mm (40.1
in.) (the front to back distance)
3. Verify that the four eyebolts are positioned to match the dimensions is given in the following figures.
Figure 1. Eyebolt positioning for 610 mm (24 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 2. Eyebolt positioning for 600 mm (23.6 in.) floor tile layout
Figure 3. Stabilizer bar layout (top view)
Rack specifications
185
Planning
4. Install the eyebolts to the floor.
Figure 4. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
Figure 5. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 228.6 mm to 330.2 mm (9 in. to 13 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P2999)
186
Rack specifications
Planning
Figure 6. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
Figure 7. Turnbuckle assembly frame tie down hardware for 304.8 mm to 558.8 mm (12 in. to 22 in.)
raised floor (Part number 44P3000)
Rack specifications
187
Planning
Considerations for multiple system installations
When you are integrating a 57/92 with a model ESCALA PL 3250R and other products in your data center,
consider the following factors:
• Minimum aisle width
The minimum aisle width in the front of the system is 1041 mm (41 in.) to allow room to perform
service operations. The minimum aisle width in the rear of the system is 914 mm (36 in.) to allow
room to perform service operations. The front and rear service clearances should be at least 1143
mm (45 in.) and 914 mm (36 in.), respectively. Service clearances are measured from the edges of
the frame with frame extenders to the nearest obstacle.
• Thermal interactions
Systems should be faced front-to-front and rear-to-rear to create "cool" and "hot" aisles to maintain
effective system thermal conditions, as shown in the following figure.
Cool aisles need to be of sufficient width to support the airflow requirements of the installed systems
as indicated in Cooling requirements. The airflow per tile will be dependent on the under floor
pressure and perforations in the tile. A typical under floor pressure of 0.025 in. of water will supply
300-400 cfm through a 25 percent open 0.61 mm by 0.61 m (2 ft. by 2 ft.) floor tile.
• Floor tile requirements
In a multiframe installation, it is possible that a floor tile with cable cutouts (refer to Cut and place floor
panels) will bear two concentrated static loads up to 408 kg (900 lb.) per caster or leveler. Thus, the
total concentrated load can be as high as 816 kg (1800 lb.). Contact the floor tile manufacturer or
consult a structural engineer to ensure that the raised floor assembly can support this load.
Figure 1. Proposed floor layout for multiple systems
188
Rack specifications
Planning
Total system power consumption
The following table provides input power ranges based on system configuration.
Table 1. Total system power consumption
Configuration - number of I/O drawers and switches
Rack specifications
AC power
(kW)
1
1.5
2
2.7
3
3.7
4
5.0
5
6.2
6
7.4
7
8.5
8
9.7
9
10.9
189
Planning
10
12.0
11
13.2
12
14.4
Note:
1. Configurations are based in 16 disk drives per I/O drawer and
20 PCI cards per I/O drawer. To determine the typical power
consumption for a specific configuration, subtract the following
typical power values for each unpopulated disk drive or PCI
card:
♦ Each PCI card - 20 W
♦ Each disk drive - 20 W
Cooling requirements
The 57/92 requires air for cooling. As shown in Figure 1, rows of 57/92 systems must face front-to-front. The
use of a raised floor is recommended to provide air through perforated floor panels placed in rows between
the fronts of systems (the cold aisles shown in Figure 1).
The following table provides system cooling requirements based on system configuration. The letter
designations in the table correspond to the letter designations in the graph shown in Cooling requirements
graph.
Table 1. Cooling system requirements based on system configuration
Configuration -number of I/O drawers and
switches
AC power (kW)
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
B
5
B
6
C
7
C
8
D
9
D
10
E
11
E
12
F
190
Rack specifications
Planning
Cooling requirements graph
Figure 1. Cooling requirements
Moving the system to the installation site
You should determine the path that must be taken to move the system from the delivery location to the
installation site. You should verify that the height of all doorways, elevators, and so on are sufficient to allow
moving the system to the installation site. You should also verify that the weight limitations of elevators,
ramps, floors, floor tiles, and so on, are sufficient to allow moving the system to the installation site. If the
height or weight of the system can cause a problem when the system is moved to the installation site, you
should contact your local site planning or marketing representative. For more detailed information, see
Access.
Delivery and subsequent transportation of the equipment
DANGERHeavy equipment
mishandled. (D006)
personal injury or equipment damage might result if
You must prepare your environment to accept the new product based on the installation planning information
provided, with assistance from an authorized service provider. In anticipation of the equipment delivery,
prepare the final installation site in advance so that professional movers or riggers can transport the
equipment to the final installation site within the computer room. If for some reason, this is not possible at the
time of delivery, you must make arrangements to have professional movers or riggers return to finish the
transportation at a later date. Only professional movers or riggers should transport the equipment. The
authorized service provider can only perform minimal frame repositioning within the computer room, as
needed, to perform required service actions. You are also responsible for using professional movers or riggers
when you relocate or dispose of equipment.
Rack specifications
191
Planning
Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Depending on the number of Bulk Power Regulators (BPRs) in your system, phase imbalance can occur in
line currents. All systems are provided with two bulk power assemblies (BPAs), with separate power cords.
Phase currents will be divided between two power cords in normal operation. The following table illustrates
phase imbalance as a function of BPR configuration. For information about power consumption, see Total
system power consumption.
Table 1. Phase imbalance and BPR configuration
Number of BPRs per BPA
Phase A Line Current
Phase B Line Current
Phase C Line
Current
1
Power / Vline
Power / Vline
0
2
0.5 Power / Vline
0.866 Power / Vline
0.5 Power /
Vline
3
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power / Vline
0.577 Power /
Vline
Note: Power is calculated from Total system power consumption. Vline is line-to-line nominal
input voltage. Since total system power is divided between two power cords, divide the power
number by two.
Balancing power panel loads
When three-phase power is used, and depending on the system configuration, the phase currents can be fully
balanced or unbalanced. System configurations with three BPRs per BPA have balanced power panel loads,
while configurations with only one or two have unbalanced loads. With two BPRs per BPA, two of the three
phases will draw an equal amount of current, and will be, nominally, 57.8 percent of the current on the third
phase. With one BPR per BPA, two of three phases will carry an equal amount of current, with no current
drawn on the third phase. The following figure is an example of feeding several loads of this type from two
power panels in a way that balances the load among the three phases.
Note: Use of ground-fault-interrupt (GFI) circuit breakers is not recommended for this system because GFI
circuit breakers are earth-leakage-current sensing circuit breakers and this system is a high
earth-leakage-current product.
Figure 1. Power panel load balancing
192
Rack specifications
Planning
The method illustrated in the preceding figure requires that the connection from the three poles of each
breaker to the three phase pins of a connector be varied. Some electricians may prefer to maintain a
consistent wiring sequence from the breakers to the connectors. The following figure shows a way to balance
the load without changing the wiring on the output of any breakers. The three-pole breakers are alternated
with single-pole breakers, so that the three-pole breakers do not all begin on Phase A.
Figure 2. Power panel load balancing
The following figure shows another way of distributing the unbalanced load evenly. In this case, the three-pole
breakers are alternated with two-pole breakers.
Figure 3. Power panel load balancing
Power cord configuration
The power cords exit the system from different points of the frame as indicated in the following figure. For
raised-floor applications, it is recommended that both cords be routed to the rear of the frame and through the
same floor-tile cutout.
Figure 1. Single-frame system power cord configuration
Rack specifications
193
Planning
Figure 2. Double-frame system power cord configuration
Dual power installation
Some 57/92 configurations are designed with a fully redundant power system. These systems have two power
cords attached to two power input ports which, in turn, power a fully redundant power distribution system
within the system. To take full advantage of the redundancy/reliability that is built into the computer system,
the system must be powered from two distribution panels.
Weight distribution
The following table shows the values used for calculating floor loading for the 57/92. The weights specified
include covers, while the width and depth are indicated without covers.
Table 1. Floor loading for system with 8 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 8 I/O drawers and without
integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
194
1 frame
lb./ft2
kg/m2
Rack specifications
Planning
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 208.9
1020.2
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 166.3
811.8
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 139.7
681.9
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 142.1
693.6
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 114.9 ESCALA PL 1650R-L+.0
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 98.0
478.3
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 108.4
529.1
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 89.0
434.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 77.0
375.8
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 89.7
438.2
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 74.7
364.8
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 65.4
319.1
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight
distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm (45
in.) for the front of the frame and 914 mm (36 in.) for
the rear of the frame (measured from the base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should not
exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when
measured from the base frame.
Table 2. Floor loading for systems with 6 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for systems with 6 I/O drawers
and with integrated battery backup
a (sides)
b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
1 frame
lb./ft2 kg/m2
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 189.0 922.9
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 151.0 737.1
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 127.2 621.2
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 129.4 631.7
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 105.2 513.4
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 90.1 439.7
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 99.3 485.0
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 82.1 400.8
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.3 348.3
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 82.7 403.9
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 69.3 338.5
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 61.0 297.8
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent
from weight distribution distance
and must be at least 1143 mm (45
in.) for the front of the frame and
914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the
frame (measured from the base
Rack specifications
195
Planning
frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not
be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution
distances should not exceed 762
mm (30 in.) in any direction when
measured from the base frame.
Table 3. Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and without integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers
and without integrated battery backup
a (sides)
b (front)
c (back)
mm in. mm in. mm in.
25
2 frames
lb./ft2 kg/m2
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 167.5 817.7
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 134.4 656.3
25
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 113.8 555.7
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 135.5 661.6
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 109.9 536.4
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 93.9 458.4
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 113.4 553.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 92.9 453.7
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 80.1 391.3
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 98.7 482.1
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 81.6 398.5
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 71.0 346.5
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent
from weight distribution distance
and must be at least 1143 mm (45
in.) for the front of the frame and
914 mm (36 in.) for the rear of the
frame (measured from the base
frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not
be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution
distances should not exceed 762
mm (30 in.) in any direction when
measured from the base frame.
Table 4. Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and with integrated battery backup
Floor loading for system with 12 I/O drawers and with
integrated battery backup
a (sides) b (front)
c (back)
2 frames
lb./ft2
kg/m2
25
1.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 181.3
885.3
25
1.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 145.1
708.3
mm in. mm in. mm in.
196
Rack specifications
Planning
1.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 122.4
597.9
254 10.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 146.2
25
714.0
254 10.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 118.1
576.7
254 10.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 100.6
491.1
508 20.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 122.0 ESCALA PL 6450R.9
508 20.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 99.5
485.9
508 20.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 85.5
417.4
762 30.0 254 10.0 254 10.0 105.9
517.0
762 30.0 508 20.0 508 20.0 87.1
425.4
762 30.0 762 30.0 762 30.0 75.4
368.3
Note:
1. Service clearance is independent from weight
distribution distance and must be at least 1143 mm
(45 in.) for the front of the frame and 914 mm (36
in.) for the rear of the frame (measured from the
base frame).
2. Weight distribution area should not be overlapped.
3. Floor loading weight distribution distances should
not exceed 762 mm (30 in.) in any direction when
measured from the base frame.
Floor loading for the system is illustrated in the Proposed Floor Layout for Multiple Systems in Considerations
for multiple system installations.
Unit emergency power off
The server has a unit emergency power off (UEPO) switch on the front of the first frame (A Frame). Refer to
the following figure, which shows a simplified UEPO panel.
Figure 1. Unit emergency power off
Rack specifications
197
Planning
When the switch is reset, the utility power is confined to the system power compartment. All volatile data will
be lost.
It is possible to attach the computer room emergency power off (EPO) system to the system UEPO. When
this is done, resetting the computer room EPO disconnects all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit, if it is provided. All volatile data will be lost in this case also.
If the room EPO is not connected to the UEPO, resetting the computer room EPO removes ac power from the
system. If the interlock bypass feature is used, the system remains powered for a short time based on system
configuration.
Computer room emergency power off (EPO)
When the integrated battery backup is installed and the room EPO is reset, the batteries will engage and the
computer will continue to run. It is possible to attach the computer room EPO system to the machine EPO.
When this is done, resetting the room EPO will disconnect all power from the power cords and the internal
battery backup unit. In this event all volatile data will be lost.
To incorporate the integrated battery backup into the room Emergency Power Off systems (EPO), a cable
must be made to connect to the back of the system EPO panel. The following figures illustrate how this
connection is made.
Figure 1. Computer room emergency power off
The preceding figure illustrates the back of the machine UEPO panel with the room EPO cable plugging into
the machine. Notice the switch actuator. After it is moved to make the cable connection possible, the room
EPO cable must be installed for the machine to power on.
198
Rack specifications
Planning
In the following figure, an AMP connector 770019-1 is needed to connect to the system EPO panel. For room
EPO cables using wire sizes #20 AWG to #24 AWG, use AMP pins (part number 770010-4). This connection
should not exceed 5 Ohms, which is approximately 200 ft.(61 m) of #24 AWG.
Figure 2. AMP connector figure
Machine holdup times
The following tables illustrate typical machine holdup times (time versus load) for fresh and aged batteries.
• All times are listed in minutes
• Machine load is listed in total ac input power (power for both power cords combined)
• A fresh battery is defined as 2.5 years old or less.
• An aged battery is defined as 6.5 years.
Note: Battery capacity decreases gradually as the battery ages (from fresh-battery value to aged-battery
value). The system diagnoses a failed-battery condition if the capacity decreases below the aged-battery
value.
Table 1. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for fresh battery
Typical machine holdup time vs. load for fresh battery
Machine load
3.3 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
N
R
N
R
1 BPR
7.0
21.0
2.1
7.0
2 BPR
21.0 50.0
7.0
3 BPR
10 kW
13.33 kW
N
R
N
21.0
4.0
11.0
2.1
7.0
32.0 68.0 12.0 32.0
7.0
21.0
4.9
12.0
16.67 kW
R
20 kW
21.67 kW
N
R
N
R
N
R
3.2
9.5
2.1
7.0
1.7
6.5
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant
Table 2. Typical machine-holdup time versus load for aged battery
Typical machine holdup time vs. load for aged battery
Machine load
3.3 kW
6.67 kW
Integrated
battery
backup
configuration
N
N
Rack specifications
R
R
10 kW
N
R
13.33 kW
N
R
16.67 kW
N
R
20 kW
N
R
21.67 kW
N
R
199
Planning
1 BPR
4.2
12.6
1.3
4.2
2 BPR
12.6 30.0
4.2
12.6
2.4
6.6
1.3
4.2
3 BPR
19.2 41.0
7.2
19.2
4.2
12.6
2.9
7.2
1.9
5.7
1.3
4.2
1.0
3.9
N=Non-redundant, R=Redundant
Hardware management console specifications
This topic provides specifications for the following Hardware Management Consoles (HMCs).
• 10C/03 desktop Hardware Management Console
• 10C/04 desktop Hardware Management Console
• 10C/05 desktop Hardware Management Console
• 10C/R2 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console
• 10C/R3 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console
10C/03 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of logical
partitions and the use of Power On Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with
managed systems to detect, consolidate, and send information for analysis. The HMC provides service
technicians with diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.
Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Dimensions
Width
Metric
Depth
425 mm 425 mm
English
16.7 in.
16.7 in.
Height Weight
140
mm
12.0 kg
5.5 in. 26.5 lb.
Electrical
Power source loading
0.11 kVa to 0.35
kVa
Input voltage
100 V ac to 127
V ac
200 V ac to 240
V ac
Frequency (hertz)
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum)
375 Btu/hr. (110
watts)
Thermal output (maximum)
1195 Btu/hr.
(350 watts)
Maximum altitude
3048 m (10000
ft.)
Air temperature requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 95
degrees F) at altitude 0 to 914 m
10 to 43 degrees C (50 to
109.4 degrees F)
200
Hardware management console specifications
Planning
(2999 ft.)
Humidity requirements
Noncondensing humidity
Noise
Nonoperating
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Operating
Nonoperating
6.5 bels
6.5 bels
emissions1
LWAd
1
Operating
See Acoustics for definitions of noise emissions positions.
10C/04 desktop Hardware Management Console specifications
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of logical
partitions and use of Power On Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed
systems to detect, consolidate, and send information for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.
Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Metric
442 mm 401 mm
English
17.4 in.
15.8 in.
Height
Weight (minimum configuration
as shipped)
Weight
(maximum
configuration)
146 mm
11.0 kg
14.0 kg
5.7 in.
24 lb.
31 lb.
Electrical1
Power source loading
0.09 kVa to 0.32 kVa
90 V ac to 100 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
137 V ac to 265 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum)
256 Btu/hr. (75 watts)
Thermal output (maximum)
1058 Btu/hr. (310 watts)
Maximum altitude
2134 m (7000 ft.)
Air temperature requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 95 degrees
F) at altitude 0 to 2134 m (7000 ft.)
10 to 43 degrees C (50 to 109.4 degrees F)
10 to 32 degrees C (50 to 89.6
degrees F) at altitude 914 m (2999
ft.) to 2133 m (6998 ft.)
Humidity requirements
Noncondensing humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Operating
Nonoperating
4.4 bels
4.3 bels
31 dB
29 dB
Noise emissions2
LWAd
LpAm (1-meter bystander
position)
Hardware management console specifications
201
Planning
LpAm (.5-meter operator
postion)
35 dB
33 dB
Note:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features
installed and the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures
specified by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are
reported in accordance with IS) 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed
the average values stated because of room reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared
sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large number of computers will operate.
desktop Hardware Management Console specifications
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of logical
partitions and use of Power On Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed
systems to detect, consolidate, and send information for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.
Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Weight (minimum
configuration as shipped)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
Metric
438 mm
540 mm
216 mm
16.3 kg
20.8 kg
English
17.25 in.
21.25 in.
8.5 in.
36 lb.
45.8 lb.
Electrical1
Power source loading
0.106 kVa to 0.352 kVa
100 - 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 - 240 V ac (high range)
47 Hz to 53 Hz (low range)
Frequency (hertz)
57 Hz to 63 Hz (high range)
Thermal output (minimum)
361 Btu/hr. (106 watts)
Thermal output (maximum)
1201 Btu/hr. (352 watts)
Maximum altitude
2134 m (7000 ft.)
Air temperature requirements
Operating
Nonoperating and shipping
10 to 35 degrees C (50 to
95 degrees F)
0 to 60 degrees C (-32 to 140 degrees F)
Humidity requirements
Noncondensing
humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Declared A-weighted
sound power level,
LWAd (bels)
Declared A-weighted sound pressure level, LpAm (dB)
Noise emissions2
Product
description
Operating Nonoperating
202
Operating
Nonoperating
Hardware management console specifications
Planning
One hard disk
drive
configuration
5.2
4.8
37
33
Note:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features
installed and the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures
specified by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are
reported in accordance with IS) 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed
the average values stated because of room reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared
sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large number of computers will operate.
10C/R2 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of logical
partitions and use of Power On Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed
systems to detect, consolidate, and send information for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.
This HMC mounts in a 19-inch system rack. The 0551 rack is recommended. This rack operates with a
voltage range of 200 V ac to 240 V ac. For additional information about this rack, see 0551 rack.
Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Dimensions
Width
Depth
Height Weight
Metric
440 mm 660 mm 43 mm 12.7 kg
English
17.3 in. 25.98 in. 1.69 in. 28.4 lb.
Electrical
Power source loading
0.11 kVa to
0.35 kVa
Input voltage
100 V ac to 127
V ac
200 V ac to 240
V ac
Frequency (hertz)
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum)
375 Btu/hr. (110
watts)
Thermal output (maximum)
1195 Btu/hr.
(350 watts)
Maximum altitude
3048 m (10000
ft.)
Air temperature requirements
Operating
10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 95
degrees F) at altitude 0 to 914 m
(2999 ft.)
Nonoperating
10 to 43 degrees C (50 to
109.4 degrees F)
10 to 32 degrees C (50 to 89.6
degrees F) at altitude 914 m (2999
Hardware management console specifications
203
Planning
ft.) to 2133 m (6998 ft.)
Humidity requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Operating
Nonoperating
6.5 bels
6.5 bels
Noncondensing humidity
Noise
Emissions1
LWAd
1
Note: See Acoustics for definitions of noise emissions
positions.
10C/R3 rack-mounted Hardware Management Console specifications
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) controls managed systems, including the management of logical
partitions and use of Power On Demand. Using service applications, the HMC communicates with managed
systems to detect, consolidate, and send information for analysis. The HMC provides service technicians with
diagnostic information for systems that can operate in a multiple-partitioned environment.
This HMC mounts in a 19-inch system rack. The 0551 rack is recommended. This rack operates with a
voltage range of 200 V ac to 240 V ac. For additional information about this rack, see 0551 rack.
Use the following specifications to plan for your HMC.
Dimensions
Width
Metric
Depth
Height
Weight (minimum
configuration)
Weight (maximum
configuration)
12.7 kg
15.6 kg
28 lb.
35 lb.
440 mm 686 mm 43 mm
English
17.32
in.
27.0 in. 1.69 in.
Electrical1
Power source loading
0.172 kVa to 0.550 kVa
100 V ac to 127 V ac (low range)
Input voltage
200 V ac to 240 V ac (high range)
Frequency (hertz)
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Thermal output (minimum)
587 Btu/hr. (172 watts)
Thermal output (maximum)
1878 Btu/hr. (ESCALA PL 450T/R watts)
Maximum altitude
2133 m (6998 ft.)
Air temperature requirements
Operating
Nonoperating
10 to 35 degrees C (50 to 95
degrees F) at altitude 0 to 2133
m (6998 ft.)
10 to 43 degrees C (50 to 109.4 degrees F)
Humidity requirements
Noncondensing
humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
8 to 80%
8 to 80%
Operating
Nonoperating
6.9 bels
6.9 bels
Noise emissions2
LWAd
204
Hardware management console specifications
Planning
Note:
1. Power consumption and heat output vary depending on the number and type of optional features
installed and the power management optional features in use.
2. These levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to the procedures
specified by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779 and are
reported in accordance with IS) 9296. Actual sound-pressure levels in a given location might exceed
the average values stated because of room reflections and other nearby noise sources. The declared
sound-power levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large number of computers will operate.
Uninterruptible power supply
To meet the power protection needs of servers, the seller has uninterruptible power supplies availableas type
9910.
The 9910 uninterruptible power supply solutions are compatible with the power requirements for these servers
and have passed rigorous testing procedures. The uninterruptible power supplies are intended to provide a
single source for purchase and protection of servers. All 9910 uninterruptible power supplies include a
premium warranty package that is designed to enhance the potential for return on investment over the
uninterruptible power supplies available on the market today.
Type 9910 uninterruptible power supply solutions are available from the following suppliers:
• Powerware
• APC
• MGE
Figure 1. Model ESCALA PL 250T/R rear view with cable install location
Figure 2. Model ESCALA PL 450T/R rear view with connection port
Figure 3. Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ rear view with connection port
Uninterruptible power supply
205
Planning
Figure 4. Model ESCALA PL 6450R and 91/94 base PCI-X expansion tower rear view with J14 connection
port
Note: The 8-way, 12-way, and 16-way processor configurations for the model ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+ consists of several 4-way processors connected together. The uninterruptible power supply
converter cable must be connected to the 4-way drawer that has the operator's panel on the front of the unit.
For the 91/94, the 1827 convertor cable is not needed. Plug the uninterruptible power supply communications
cable provided by the uninterruptible power supply supplier into the J14 port.
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
The following figure shows the four vertical PDU locations in a rack.
206
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
Planning
Power distribution units (PDUs) are required with 7014 racks. If a PDU is not defaulted or ordered, a power
cord is provided with each individual rack-mounted drawer for connection to a country-specific utility mains
receptacle or uninterruptible power supply. See the individual rack-mounted drawer specifications for the
appropriate power cords. The following PDU is available for the 7014 racks:
9188 or 7188 universal PDU
The following power cords are supported on the 9188 or 7188:
• 6489 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 3-phase IEC309 3P+N+G 32 A plug (PDU rated 24 A per phase)
• 6491 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase IEC309 P+N+G 63 A plug (PDU rated 48 A)
• 6492 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase IEC309 2P+G 60 A plug (PDU rated 48 A)
• 6653 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 3-phase IEC 309 3P+N+G 16 A plug (PDU rated 16 A per phase)
• 6654 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase NEMA L6-30 plug (PDU rated 24 A)
• 6655 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase Russell Stoll 3750DP plug (PDU rated 24 A)
• 6656 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase IEC 309 P+N+G 32A plug (PDU rated 24 A)
• 6657 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug (PDU rated 24 A)
• 6658 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) 1-phase 250 V ac, 30 A Korean plug (PDU rated 24 A)
The amperage rating of the PDU is either 16 A, 24 A, or 48 A depending on the power cord.
Note: All power cords are 4.3 m (14 ft.). For installation in Chicago, only 2.8 m (6 ft.) of the 4.3 m (14 ft.)
power cord can extend beyond the perimeter of the rack frame. If more than 2.8 m (6 ft.) can exit the rack,
retain any additional cordage within the rack frame via Velcro ties in the cable management space until 2.8 (6
ft.) or less exits the rack.
The PDU has twelve customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200-240 V ac. There are six groups of two
outlets fed by six circuit breakers. Each outlet is rated up to 10 A, but each group of two outlets is fed from
one 20 A circuit breaker. The following IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available to supply from
the PDU outlet to the rack-mounted device:
• 1422 - 3.0 m (10 ft.)
• 6458 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)
• 6459 - 3.7 m (12 ft.)
• 6095 - 3.0 m - 4.3 m (10 ft. - 14 ft.)
• 9911 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)
To calculate the power loading requirements and proper loading sequence for the 7188 and 9188 PDU, see
Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units.
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
207
Planning
The following three PDUs are available for the 7014 rack only:
9176 or 7176 single phase PDU
The following power cords are supported on the 9176 or 7176:
• 6442, 9800, or 9824 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) locking line cord (L6-30P)
• 6443 or 9801 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) watertight line cord (3750DP)
• 6444 or 9822 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug
• 6447 or 9826 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug Right Angle
• 6448 or 9835 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) 250 V ac, 30 A Korean plug
• 6449 or 9986 - 200 V ac; 1.8 m (6 ft.) locking line cord (L6-30P) Chicago
• 6450 or 9987 - 200 V ac; 1.8 m (6 ft.) watertight line cord (3750DP) Chicago
9177 or 7177 single phase PDU
The following power cord is supported on the 9177 or 7177:
• 6445 or 9823 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) (IEC 309, 3-pin, 32 A; plug type 46)
9178 or 7178 three phase wye PDU
The following power cord is supported on the 9178 or 7178:
• 400 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) (IEC 309, 5-pin, 16 A; plug type 46)
The PDUs have nine customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200-240 V ac. There are three groups of
three outlets fed by three circuit breakers. Each outlet is rated up to 10 A, but each group of three outlets is
fed from one 15 A circuit breaker. The following IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available to
supply from the PDU outlet to the rack-mounted device:
• 6095 - 3.0 m
4.3 m (10 ft.
• 9911 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)
14 ft.)
If a PDU is ordered, the following three PDUs are available for the 0551 and 0553 rack only:
208
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
Planning
5160 single phase PDU
The following power cords are supported on the 5160:
• 1426 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) locking power cord (L6-30P)
• 1427 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) watertight power cord (3750DP)
• 1446 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) 30 A Korean (250 V ac, 30 A Korean plug)
• 1447 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) 30 A AU (PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug)
• 1448 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) 30 A NZ (PDL 250 V ac; 30 A plug)
5161 single phase PDU
The following power cord is supported on the 5161:
• 1449 - 200 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) (IEC 309, 3-pin, 32 A; plug type 46)
5163 three phase wye PDU
The following power cord is supported on the 5163:
• 1477 - 400 V ac; 4.3 m (14 ft.) (IEC 309, 5-pin, 16 A; plug type 46)
The PDUs have six customer-usable IEC 320-C13 outlets rated at 200-240 V ac. Each outlet is rated 8 A and
is protected by a circuit breaker. The following IEC 320-C13 to IEC 320-C14 power cords are available to
supply from the PDU outlet to the rack-mounted device:
• 1422 - 3.0 m (10 ft.)
• 6458 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)
• 6459 - 3.7 m (12 ft.)
See 7014 rack configurations for typical configurations and PDUs when the 7014 rack is populated with
various server models.
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
209
Planning
Power cord 6489 description
This option is the 380-415 V ac, 24 A, 3-phase, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG0247 (32A) system
connector and an IEC309 (32 A, 3P+N+G) non-locking wall plug for:
• FC 7188 and 9188
Power cord 6491 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 63 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG0247 system connector
and an IEC309 (63 A, P+N+G) non-locking wall plug for:
• FC 7188 and 9188
Power cord 6492 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 48 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG0247 system connector
and an IEC309 (60 A, 2P+G) non-locking wall plug for:
• FC 7188 and 9188
7014 rack configurations
The 14T/00 provide a 1.8 meter rack (36 EIA units of total space). The 14T/42 or 0553 provides a 2.0 meter
rack (42 EIA units of total space). The various configurations for the 7014 racks are:
210
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
Planning
• 9406 feature code 7884, 9111 rack content specify code 0229 - 9406-520 and ESCALA PL 250T/R in
rack
• 9113 rack content specify code 0230, 9406 rack content specify code 7886
• 9406-570 and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ in rack, 9117 rack content specify codes 0231, 0232,
0241, 0242
• Feature code 0123 - 5074 lower expansion unit in rack; Feature code 0574 - 5074 equivalent
• Feature code 0694 - 5094 equivalent
• Feature code 0133 - Manufacturing install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810); Feature code
0137 - Field install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810)
• Feature code 0134 - Field install in rack (model 9406-825); Feature code 0138 - Field install in rack
(model 9406-825)
• Feature code 0578 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
• Feature code 0588 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
• Feature code 0595 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
9406 feature code 7884, 9111 rack content specify code 0229 - 9406-520 and ESCALA PL 250T/R in rack
rack
05511, 05531, 701413
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
7884, 0229
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
7884, PDU3
9113 rack content, specify code 0230; 9406 rack content, specify code 7886
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
211
Planning
rack
701413
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0230 (ESCALA PL 450T/R), 7886 (9406-550)
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
PDU4
9406-570 in rack, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ rack content, specify codes 0231, 0232, 0241, 0242
rack
05511, 05531, 701413
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0231, 0232, 0241, 0242
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
PDU4
Feature code 0123 - 5074 lower expansion unit in rack; Feature code 0574 - 5074 equivalent
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code 0123
212
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
Planning
Rack, specify code
0574
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
0123, 0574, PDU5
Feature code 0694 - 5094 equivalent
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0694
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
0694, PDU6
Feature code 0133 - Manufacturing install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810); Feature code 0137 Field install in rack (models 9406-800 and 9406-810)
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
01339, 01379
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
0133, 0137, PDU4
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
213
Planning
Feature code 0134 - Field install in rack (model 9406-825); Feature code 0138 - Field install in rack (model
9406-825)
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
013410, 013810
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
0134, 0138, PDU4
Feature code 0578 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0578
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
PDU8
Feature code 0588 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
214
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
Planning
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0588
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
PDU12
Feature code 0595 - PCI-X expansion unit in rack
rack
05511, 05531
Top rack, specify code
--
Bottom rack, specify code - Rack, specify code
0595
PDU support
0 to 42
Power cords
0595, PDU11
Note:
1. 0551 is an empty 1.8 meter rack with 36 EIA units of total space. 0553 is a 2.0 meter rack with 42 EIA
units of total space.
2. 0551 and 0553 feature codes 5160, 5161, 5163, and 7188. 7014 feature codes 7176, 7177, 7178,
and 7188.
3. If units plug into a power distribution unit (PDU), power jumper cord feature code 6458, 6459, 6095, or
9911 is required. If redundant power supply (feature code 5158) is ordered, a second power jumper
cord feature code is required.
4. If unit plugs into a PDU, two feature code 6458, 6459, 6095, or 9911 power jumper cords are
required.
5. Feature code 0123 or 0574 do not plug into a PDU.
6. Feature code 0125 does not plug into a PDU.
7. Supported only on MES orders and includes a rack shelf with rail assembly, adapter plate, and
cable-management-arm assembly.
8. 0578 comes with two rack power cords that plug into a PDU.
Power distribution unit and power cord options for 7014 rack
215
Planning
9. Field install in rack feature is used to mount a model 9406-270, 9406-800, or 9406-810 system unit
(14 U) with attached expansion unit. This feature provides a rack shelf (2 U) with rail assembly,
cable-management-arm assembly, adapter plate, and a pair of lift covers.
10. Field install in rack feature is used to mount a model 9406-825 system unit (14 U). This feature
provides a rack shelf (2 U), cable-management-arm assembly, adapter plate, and a pair of lift covers.
11. If unit plugs into a PDU, feature code 1422 is required. If redundant power supply (feature code 5138)
is ordered, a second feature code 1422 is required.
12. 0588 comes with two rack power cords that plug into a PDU.
13. 7014-T00 is a 1.8 meter rack with 36 EIA units of total space. 7014-T42 is a 2.0 meter rack with 42
EIA units of total space. The rack includes one PDU, feature code 9188, 9176, 9177, or 9178.
Plan for power
This topic introduces the tasks that are recommended for power planning with links to more detailed
information.
Before you begin your planning tasks, be sure you have completed the items in the following checklist:
Before you begin
__ Know your server power requirements.
__ Know your compatible hardware requirements.
__ Know your uninterruptible power supply needs.
Review power considerations
Use the following resources to build a complete power plan. Refer to the checklist at the bottom of this page
for the required elements of your power plan.
• General power considerations
• Power planning
• Power specifications
• Power cord features, power cords, plugs, and receptacles
When you are finished
__ Consult a qualified electrician regarding power needs.
__ Determine an uninterruptible power supply vendor.
__ Complete your server information form or forms.
General power information
Information Technology equipment requires a reliable electrical power source that is free from interference or
disturbance. Electrical power companies generally supply power of sufficient quality. The Power
quality,Voltage and frequency limits, Power load, and Power source topics provide the guidance and
specifications needed to meet the requirements of the equipment. Qualified personnel must ensure that
electrical power distribution system is safe and meets local and national codes. They must also ensure that
the voltage measured at the power receptacle is within the specified tolerance for the equipment. In addition,
216
Plan for power
Planning
a separate power feeder is required for items such as lighting and air conditioning. A properly installed
electrical power system will help to provide for reliable operation of your equipment.
Other factors to consider when planning and installing the electrical system include a means of providing a
low impedance conducting path to ground (path to earth) and lightning protection. Depending on the
geographical location, special considerations may be required for lightning protection. Your electrical
contractor should meet all local and national electrical code requirements. Building electrical power is normally
derived from a three-phase power distribution system. General office areas are normally provided with
single-phase power outlets, and data processing rooms are provided with three-phase power.
Some IT equipment and devices may require standard three-phase power; others may require single-phase
power. The power requirements for each device are specified in the individual server specifications for that
server. Nominal voltage, plugs, receptacles, and in some cases, conduit and back boxes are listed in the
specific server specifications. Refer to the respective server specifications to determine the power
requirements. Ensure that existing branch circuit outlets are the correct type and are properly grounded (see
Grounding).
Determining your power requirements
Your server can have power requirements different from a PC (such as, different voltage and different plugs).
Your seller supplies power cords with an attached plug that corresponds to the power outlet most commonly
used in the country or region to which the product is being shipped. You, the customer, must supply the
proper power outlets.
1. Plan for system electrical service.For information on power requirements for a specific model, refer to
the electrical section in the server specifications for that particular server. For information on power
requirements for expansion units or peripherals, select the appropriate device from the list of
compatible hardware specifications. For equipment not listed, check your equipment documentation
(owner's manuals) for specifications.
2. Determine your server's plug and receptacle type so you can have the proper outlets installed. Tip:
Print a copy of your plug and receptacle table and give it to your electrician. The table contains
information needed for installing outlets.
3. Write down power information in your Server Information Form 3A. Include:
♦ Plug type
♦ Input voltage
♦ Power cord length (optional)
4. Plan for power outages. Consider purchasing an uninterruptible power supply to protect your system
against power fluctuations and outages. If your company owns a uninterruptible power supply, involve
your uninterruptible power supply vendor with any type of uninterruptible power supply modification.
5. Plan an emergency power-off switch. As a safety precaution, you should provide some method for
disconnecting power to all equipment in your server area. Put emergency power-off switches in
locations readily accessible to your systems operator and at designated exits from the room.
6. Ground your system. Electrical grounding is important both for safety and correct operation. Your
electrician should follow your national and local electrical codes when installing the electrical wiring,
outlets, and power panels. These codes take precedence over any other recommendations.
7. Contact an electrician. Contact a qualified electrician to take care of your server power requirements
and install needed power outlets. Give the electrician a copy of your power information. You can print
the recommended power distribution wiring diagram as a reference for your electrician.
Plug and receptacle types: By model
Select your model to find its plug and receptacle type and power cord features.
• Model ESCALA PL 245T/R
• Model 471/85
General power information
217
Planning
• Model ESCALA PL 250R-L
• Model 112/85
• Model ESCALA PL 250T/R
• Model ESCALA PL 450T/R
• Model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• Model ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
• Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• Model 185/75
• Model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R
• Model ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• Model ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 245T/R
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 10 A
Type 75
100-127 V, 15 A
Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 12 A
Type 59
250 V, 15 A
Type 5
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A
Type 57
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your marketing representative.
218
Determining your power requirements
Planning
Plug and receptacle type 6
Plug
Plug
Countries/Regions
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC 83-A5
Australia, Fiji, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Western Samoa, Kiribati,
Nauru
Type 6 250V 10A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6479 (T)
13F9940 and 39M51021 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
6680 (T)
13F9938 and 39M51001 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T) (U)
6468 and
6681(U)
Cord Rating
2.4 kVA cord (T)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 24
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
*Schweizerischer Elecktrotechnischer
Verein
SEV 24507
Liechtenstein, Switzerland
Type 24 250V 10A
Cord Feature
Part Number
Determining your power requirements
Cord Rating
219
Planning
6476 (T)
14F0051 and 39M51581 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
6465 (U)
14F0049 and 39M51561 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (U)
2.4 kVA cord (T)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 62
Plug
Plug
Countries/Regions
International Electrotechnical Commission 320 C13
CCC certified GB 1053
People's Republic of China
Type 62 250V 10A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6452(U)
02K0546 and 39M52061 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
6493 (T)
02K0544 and 39M52041 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)(U)
Cord Rating
2.4 kVA cord (K) (T)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
220
Determining your power requirements
Planning
Plug and receptacle type 59
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Type 59 250V 15A
JIS C-8303-1983
Japan
Type 59 125V 20A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6670 (C)
34G0222 and 39M51981 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (B) (C)
6660 (C)
34G0224 and 39M52001 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (B) (C)
Cord Rating
1.2 kVA cord (A) (B)
Systems and expansion units
(B) - Expansion units 5070, 5072, 5080, 5082
(C) - Model 7/10, ESCALA PL 250R-L, , 57/86, 57/87, D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250R-VL or
ESCALA PL 450R-XS, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL
450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL 1650R-L+,
10C/04,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 5
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA WD-1: 6-15P
Type 5 250V 15A
Determining your power requirements
Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda,
Bolivia, Bonaire, Canada, Caicos Islands, Cayman Islands, Costa
Rica, Curacao, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam,
Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Montserrat, Netherland
221
Planning
Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi
Arabia, St. Marten, Taiwan, Thailand, Tobago, Tortola, Turks
Island, United States, Venezuela, Virgin Islands
Cord Feature
Part Number
6469 (T) (K)
1838576 and 39M50941 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (T)
6487 (T)
1838573 and 39M50961 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T)
6455(W)
6952287 and 39M50931 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T) (W)
Cord Rating
2.4 kVA cord (T)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL 250R-VL or
ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL 1650R-L+, ESCALA PL
250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 250R-L
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A
Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 12 A
Type 59
250 V, 15 A
Type 5
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69, Type 73
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
222
Determining your power requirements
Planning
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your marketing representative.
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL
450T/R 7/20, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 34, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A
Type 4, Type 70
250 V, 15 A
Type 5, Type 10, Type 34, Type 64
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the table above, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your Country or Region (the Country or Region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your Country or Region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your Country or Region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your Country or Region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL
450R-XS
Determining your power requirements
223
Planning
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
100-127 V, 15 A
Type 4, Type 70
100-127 V, 10 A
Type 75
100-127 V, 12 A
Type 59
250 V, 15 A
Type 5
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A
Type 57
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the table above, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your Country or Region (the Country or Region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your Country or Region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your Country or Region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your Country or Region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 62
250 V, 15 A
Type 5, Type 10
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69, Type 73, Type 76
200-240 V, 12 A
Type 57
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the preceding table, find the Voltage and Amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type that is listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports
your model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
224
Determining your power requirements
Planning
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your country or region (the country or region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your country or region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your country or region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your country or region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your marketing representative.
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
Voltage and
amperage
Plug and receptacle type
250 V, 10 A
Type 2, Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 25, Type 32, Type 34, Type 62
250 V, 15 A
Type 5, Type 10, Type 34, Type 64
250 V, 16 A
Type 18, Type 22, Type 25, Type 32
250 V, 13 A
Type 23
200-240 V, 10 A
Type 66, Type 69
To determine the plug and receptacle type your model will need, follow these steps:
1. In the table above, find the Voltage and amperage of your power supply.
The Plug and receptacle type listed in the same row as your voltage and amperage supports your
model.
2. Click on the plug and receptacle Type to view information about that type.
If more than one plug appears in your row:
1. Click one of the plug and receptacle types.
2. In the Plug and Receptacles table, look for your Country or Region (the Country or Region where your
model will reside) in the Countries or regions column (on the right side of the table).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you find your Country or Region in the Plug and Receptacle table.
The plug and receptacle type that lists your Country or Region is the type for which you need to plan.
Note: If your Country or Region is not listed or, for some reason, you still cannot determine your plug and
receptacle type, contact your seller.
Plug and receptacle types: Model 185/75
For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles used with the Model 185/75, see 185/75 power cord
features.
Determining your power requirements
225
Planning
Plug and receptacle types: Model ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL
6450R
For a detailed description of the plug and receptacles used with Models ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL
6450R, see ESCALA PL 3250R, ESCALA PL 6450R power cord features.
Server Information Form 3A
Frame Device Type Device Description Feature Code Plug Type/Input Voltage Notes
226
Determining your power requirements
Planning
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
To determine what power cord, plug, and receptacle type your server or system requires, you need three
pieces of information:
• The Country or Region in which your server or system will reside
• Your server or system Model
• The Voltage and amperage of your power supply
With this information, you can determine your type through these tables:
• Power cords, plugs, and receptacles: By model
• Power cords, plugs, and receptacles: By voltage and amperage
• Power cord features
• Power load calculating for 7188 and 9188 power distribution units
Tip: Print the Plug and receptacle type table for your server or system and give it to your electrician. The table
contains information needed to install the proper receptacle for your system expansion unit.
The server or system and all of the expansion units and attached equipment will require an isolated power
supply. This means, it must have its own circuit. It is highly recommended that an uninterruptible power supply
be used to help protect both the server and its data.
Power cords: Plugs and receptacles
Note: When you select a plug and receptacle type, you will see a Plug and receptacle type table. Look for
your Country or Region (where your system or server will reside) in the Countries or regions section (right
side of table) and your model type in the Systems and expansion units section (bottom of table). You will
find the plug type that supports your system or server in the table that lists both your model and your Country
or Region.
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
227
Planning
Voltage and
amperage
100 - 127 V 10 A
Plug and receptacle type
Type 75
100 - 127 V 10A/15A Type 70
100 - 127V 15A
Type 4 ,
200 - 240 V 10A
Type 2, Type 66, Type 68, Type 69
200 - 240 V 15A
Type 64
200 - 240V 10A
Type 6, Type 19, Type 24, Type 62, Type 76
200 - 240 V 12 A
Type 57
200 - 240 V 10A/15A Type 34, Type 73
200 - 240 V 10A/16A Type 25, Type 32
200 - 240 V 10A/13A Type 23
200 - 240 V 15A
Type 5, , Type 10, , Type 74, Type 76
200 - 240 10A/16A
Type 18, Type 22, ,
Plug and receptacle type 75
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Type 75 100 - 127 V 10A
NEMA 5-15P
Taiwan
Cord Feature Part Number
6651 (A)
39M5247 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A)
39M5246 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (A)
Systems and expansion units
(A) - ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL
1650R/R+, ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87
, D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+, ESCALA
PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85,
ESCALA PL 1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+,
ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, , 5095
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the
Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
228
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Plug and receptacle Type 70
Table 1.
Plug
Receptacle Countries/Regions
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
iNMETRO NBR 6147
Brazil
Type 70 100-127V 15A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6471(T)
49P2110 and 39M52331 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
Cord Rating
1.6 kVA Cord (T)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA
PL 1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 4
Table 1.
Plug
Receptacle Countries/Regions
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA WD-1: 5-15P
Type 4
100-127V
15A
Anguilla, Antigua, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bonaire, Bolivia,
Caicos Islands, Canada, Canary Islands, Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica,
Curacao, Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Ecuador, Guam, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico, Montserrat, Netherland Antilles, Nevis,
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
229
Planning
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, St. Kitts, St.
Martin, Taiwan, Tobago, Tortola BVI, Trinidad, Turk Islands, United States,
Venezuela, Virgin Islands, Yemen
Cord Feature Part Number
6470 and
6460 (T) (K)
(B) (U)
86G7648 and 39M50801 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (T)
87G3880 and 39M50821 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T)
6952301 and 39M50801 - 1.8 m (6 ft.)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, and ,
7/20
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 64
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
International Electrotechnical Commission
iNMETRO
Type 64 250V 15A
Cord Feature Part Number
6495 (L)
74P4393 and 39M52401 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (L)
Cord Rating
3.8 kVA cord (L)
Systems and expansion units
(L) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use
of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
230
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Plug and receptacle type 57
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Type 57 200 - 240 V 12 A
NEMA 6-15
Japan
Type 57 200 - 240 V 12 A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6687 (A) (B)
25R2576 and 39M51851 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (A) (B)
6669 (A) (B)
25R2578 and 39M51871 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (A) (B)
6456 (A) (B)
25R2573 and 39M51731 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (A) (B)
6691 (C)
25R2582 and 39M53351 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (A) (B)
25R2580 and 39M53331 - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (A) (B)
25R2581 and 39M53341 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A) (B)
25R2577 and 39M51981 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (A) (B)
25R2578 and 39K52351 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (C)
Systems and expansion units
(A) - ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA
PL 1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3,
10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 32
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
231
Planning
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
Standards Institution of Israel
SII 32-1971
Israel
Type 32 250V 10A/16A
Cord Feature
Part Number
Cord Rating
6475 (T)
14F0087 and 39M51721 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
2.4 kVA cord (B) (G) (H) (K) (T)
6464(U)
14F0088 and 39M51731 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T)
14F0085 and 39M51701 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)(U)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 23
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
British Standards Institution
BS 1363A
Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus,
Dominica, Gambia, Ghana, Grenada, Grenadines, Guyana, Iraq,
Ireland, Hong Kong S.A.R. of the PRC, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait,
Liberia, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar, Nevis, Nigeria, Oman,
Qatar, Sabah, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, St. Lucia, St.
Kitts, St. Vincent, Sudan, Tanzania, Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates, United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia
Type 23 250V 13A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6474 (T)
14F0033 and 39M51511 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
6463 (U)
14F0034 and 39M51521 - 4.3 m (14 ft.) (T)
14F0031 and 39M51491 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)(U)
Systems and expansion units
232
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 10
Plug
Receptacle
Countries/Regions
National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA WD-5: L6-15P
Canada, Colombia, Japan, Mexico, United States, Uruguay
NEMA
Type 10 250V 15A L6-15R
Locking
Note: Plug Type 10 supports models 9910-080 in Colombia and Mexico.
Plug Type 10 is not available in Canada and the United States for these
models.
Cord Feature
Part Number
6497(J) (M)
86G7878 and 39M51151 (10 A only) - 1.8 m (6 ft.) (M)
Systems and expansion units
(M) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Plug and receptacle type 22
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
233
Planning
Plug
Receptacle Countries/Regions
South African Bureau of Standards
SABS 164 BS 546
Bangladesh, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka, LeSotho, Maceo, Maldives,
Namibia, Nepal, Samoa, South Africa, Swaziland, Uganda
Type 22 250V
16A
Cord Feature
Part Number
6477 (T)
14F0015 and 39M51441 - 2.7 m (9 ft.) (T)
6466 (U)
14F0013 and 39M51421 - 4.3 m (14 ft.)(U)
Migration (K)
Systems and expansion units
(T) - Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+, ESCALA PL
250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS, 57/86 , 57/87 , D24, T24, ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL
450T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+, ESCALA PL 245T/R, 471/85, ESCALA PL
1650R-L+, ESCALA PL 250R-L+ or ESCALA PL 450R-VL+, ESCALA PL 250R-L, 10C/R3, 10C/04, ,
Note:
1. This part meets the European Union Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Power cord features
When ordering power cords (also known as power cables), use power cord options to specify features like
length and general plug type.
You can use some of the option numbers in conjunction with each other. For example, 9182 specifies a 4.3 m
(14 ft.) cord, and 9183 specifies a locking power cord.
The following lists the power cords and a general description of the power cord. Select the option number for
a full description, including requirements.
Note: Some features are not available in all Countries or Regions, for all systems, or with all other options.
Select the option number and check the full descriptions of the power cord for these prohibitions.
Feature or Voltage
option code
Amperage
Length
System
connector
Plug
6451
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
IS 6538
6452
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
GB 1053 (CCC Cert)
6453
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
IRAM 2073
234
Comments
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
6454
200-240 V 16 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
6455
200-240 V 15 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
6456
200-240 V 12 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
NEMA 6-15
6458
100-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
IEC320-14
Inside the
rack, this
cord
connects a
drawer to
the PDU for
power
6459
200-240 V 10 A
ac
3.66 m
(12 ft.)
IEC320-C14
Inside the
rack, this
cord
connects a
drawer to
the PDU for
power
6460
120-127 V 12 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
NEMA 5-15 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6461
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
CEE 7 VII
6462
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
DK2-5e
6463
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
BS1364A
6464
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
SII 32-1971
6465
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
SEV 24507
6466
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
SABS 1661
6467
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
CEI 23-16
6468
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
AS3112-1964, NZS 198
6469
200-240 V 12 A (15 A
ac
derated)
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
6470
100-127 V 12 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
IEC320-C13
NEMA 5-15 non-locking
wall plug
6471
100-127 V 15 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
INMETRO NBR 6147
This cord
(NEMA 5-15) non-locking connects a
wall plug
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6472
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
Schucko non-locking wall This cord
plug
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
IEC320-C13
KSC 8305
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
235
Planning
to its power
source
6473
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
CEE Danish non-locking
plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6474
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
BS1364A non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6475
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
SII 32 non-locking wall
plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6476
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
SEV 24507 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6477
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
SABS 164 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6478
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
CEI 23-16 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6479
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
AS3112
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6487
200-240 V 12 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
IEC320-13
NEMA 6-15 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6488
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-13
IRAM 2073 non-locking
wall plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6489
380-415 V 24 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 UTG0247 (32A) IEC309 (32 A, 3P+N+G)
ac
ft.)
non-locking wall plug
236
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
6491
200-240 V 63 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ac
ft.)
IEC309 (63 A, P+N+G)
non-locking wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6492
200-240 V 48 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ac
ft.)
IEC309 (60 A, 2P+G)
non-locking wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6493
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
GB53 non-locking wall
plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6494
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
IS6538 non-locking wall
plug
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6495
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
IEC60083-A5 non-locking This cord
wall plug
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6496
200-240 V 10 A
ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
KETI non-locking wall
plug
6497
200-240 V 12 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
IEC320-13
NEMA L6-15 locking wall This cord
plug
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
6498
200-240 V 12 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
IEC320-C13
RS37204-2
water-resistant
6499
200-240 V 15 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C19
ft.)
6651
100 - 127
V ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
6653
380-415 V 16 A, 3-phase 4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ac
ft.)
IEC309 (16 A, 3P+N+G)
non-locking wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6654
200-240 V 24 A, 1-phase 4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ac
ft.)
NEMA L6-30P locking
wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
10 A
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
IEC320-C13
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
NEMA 5-15P non-locking
wall plug
237
Planning
the wall for
power
6655
200-240 V 24 A
ac
4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ft.)
Water-resistant
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6656
200-240 V 32 A
ac
4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ft.)
IEC309 (32 A, P+N+G)
non-locking wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6657
200-240 V 24 A
ac
4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ft.)
Plug type PDL
non-locking wall plug
This cord
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6658
200-240 V 24 A
ac
4.3 m (14 UTG0247
ft.)
Plug type KP non-locking This cord
wall plug
connect the
7188 or
9188 PDU to
the wall for
power
6659
200 - 240
V ac
2.7 m (9
ft.)
NEMA 6-15P
6660
120-127 V 15 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
NEMA 5-15 non-locking
wall plug
6663
200-240 V 10 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
right angle
NEMA 6-15P
6669
200-240 V 12 A (15 A
ac
derated)
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
6670
100-127 V 15 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
IEC320-C13
NEMA 5-15 non-locking
wall plug
6671
100-240 V 10 A (HV), 12 2.7 m (9
ac
A (LV)
ft.)
IEC320-C13
IEC320-C14 wall plug
6672
100-240 V 10 A (HV), 12 1.5 m (5
ac
A (LV)
ft.)
IEC320-C13
IEC320-C14 wall plug
6680
200 - 240
V ac
10 A
2.7 m (9
ft.)
IEC320-C13
AS3112-1964, NZS 198
6681
200 - 240
V ac
10 A
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C13
ft.)
AS3112-1964, NZS 198
6687
200-240 V 15 A
ac
1.8 m (6
ft.)
NEMA 6-15 non-locking
wall plug
6690
200-240 V 16 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C19
ft.)
238
10 A
IEC320-C13
IEC320-13
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
This cord
connects a
deskside or
rack drawer
to its power
source
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
6691
200-240 V 15 A
ac
4.3 m (14 IEC320-C19
ft.)
NEMA 6-15P Denan
Power cord 6451 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and IS 6538 wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6452 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and GB 1053 (CCC Cert) wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6453 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and IRAM 2073 wall plug for:
• 11D/10
• 11D/11
Power cord 6454 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and KSC 8305 wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
239
Planning
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6455 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine input connector
for:
• 11D/11
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6456 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine input connector
for:
• 11D/11
Power cord 6458 description
This option is the 100-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an IEC 320-14 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6459 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 3.66 m (12 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and an IEC 320-14 plug for:
• 57/90, 7311-11D/10, 11D/11 expansion units
240
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Power cord 6460 description
This option is the 120-127 V ac, 12 A, 4.3m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an NEMA 5-15 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, and ESCALA PL 450T/R
• 57/86, 57/87, D24,31T/24
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
Power cord 6461 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and CEE 7 VII wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6462 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and DK2-5e wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6463 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and BS1364A wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
241
Planning
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6464 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SII 32-1971 wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6465 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SEV 24507 wall plug for:
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6466 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and SABS 1661 wall plug for:
• 11D/10
• 11D/11
• 57/90
Power cord 6467 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and CEI23-16 wall plug for:
• 11D/10
• 11D/11
242
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
• 57/90
Power cord 6468 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and AS3112-1964, NZS 198 wall plug for:
• 11D/10, 11D/11
Power cord 6469 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A (15 A derated), 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine
input connector for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6470 description
This option is the 100-127 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 5-15 wall plug for:
• Models 9406-520, ESCALA PL 250T/R, 9406-550, and ESCALA PL 450T/R
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
243
Planning
• 471/85
Power cord 6471 description
This option is the 100-127 V ac, 15 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and an
iNMETRO NBR 6147 non-locking wall plug for:
• Models 9406-520, ESCALA PL 250T/R, 9406-550, ESCALA PL 450T/R, 9406-570, and ESCALA PL
850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
Power cord 6472 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and Schuko plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6473 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and a CEE wall plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
244
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6474 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and a BS 1364 A plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6475 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an SII-32 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6476 description
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
245
Planning
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320
connector and an SEV24507 wall plug for:
C13 machine input
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6477 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an SABS164 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6478 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and a CEI23-16 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
246
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Power cord 6479 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an AS3112 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6487 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 6-15 wall plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6488 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC320-C13 system connector and an
IRAM 2079 wall plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
247
Planning
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6493 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and a GB 53 plug:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6494 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and a IS 6538 plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6495 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an IEC 60083-AS plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
248
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6496 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
with a KETI wall plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6497 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) power cord with a twist-lock and an IEC 320-C13 machine
input connector and a NEMA L6-15 locking wall plug for:
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6498 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) water-resistant power cord with an IEC320-C13 machine
input connector and RS37204-2 water-resistant plug for:
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
249
Planning
• Models ESCALA PL 250T/R, ESCALA PL 450T/R, and ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Power cord 6499 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.)non-locking power cord with an IEC320-C19 machine input
connector for:
• 11D/10, 11D/11
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
Power cord 6651 description
This option is the 100-127 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 5-15P wall plug for:
• ESCALA PL 450T/R
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
Power cord 6653 description
This option is the 380-415 V ac, 16 A, 3-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector
and an IEC309 (16 A, 3P+N+G) non-locking wall plug.
Power cord 6654 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 1-phase, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector
and a NEMA L6-30P locking wall plug.
250
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Power cord 6655 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector and a
water-resistant wall plug.
Power cord 6656 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 32 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector and an
IEC309 (32 A, P+N+G) non-locking wall plug.
Power cord 6657 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector and an
plug type PDL non-locking wall plug.
Power cord 6658 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 24 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with a UTG2047 system connector and a plug
type KP non-locking wall plug.
Power cord 6659 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 6-15P wall plug for:
• ESCALA PL 250R-L
• ESCALA PL 250T/R
• ESCALA PL 450T/R
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 7/10
• 7/20
• D24
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
251
Planning
• T24
• 11D/20
• 50/95
• 57/86
• 57/87
• 10C/R3
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6660 description
This option is the 120-127 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and an NEMA 5-15 plug for:
• Model 7/20
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
Power cord 6663 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 right-angle machine
input connector
Power cord 6669 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 12 A (15 A derated), 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine
input connector for:
• 7/20
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
252
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6670 description
This option is the 100-127 V ac, 15 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 5-15 wall plug for:
• 7/20
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
Power cord 6671 description
This option is the 100 - 240 V ac, 10 A (HV), 12 A (LV), 2.7 m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine
input connector and IEC 320-C14 wall plug for:
• 14S/25 rack
• 05/55 rack
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Power cord 6672 description
This option is the 100 - 240 V ac, 10 A (HV), 12 A (LV), 1.5 m (5 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine
input connector and IEC 320-C14 wall plug for:
• 14S/11 rack
• 14S/25 rack
• 05/54 rack
• 05/55 rack
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
253
Planning
Power cord 6680 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 2.7m (9 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and AS3112-1964 and NZS 198 wall plug for:
• ESCALA PL 250R-L
• ESCALA PL 250T/R
• ESCALA PL 450T/R
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
• 9406-520
• 9406-550
• 9406-570
• 57/86
• 57/87
• 05/95
• 10C/R3
• 10C/04
• 57/86 expansion unit
• 57/87 expansion unit
• D24 expansion unit
• T24 expansion unit
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
Power cord 6681 description
This option is the 200 - 240 V ac, 10 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input
connector and AS3112-1964 and NZS 198 wall plug for:
• 11D/10
• 11D/11
Power cord 6687 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 1.8 m (6 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C13 machine input connector
and NEMA 6-15 wall plug for:
• 7/20
• ESCALA PL 250R-VL or ESCALA PL 450R-XS
• 112/85
• ESCALA PL 250T/R+ or ESCALA PL 450T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 450T/R+ or ESCALA PL 850T/R-L+
• ESCALA PL 245T/R
• 471/85
• ESCALA PL 1650R-L+
254
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
Planning
Power cord 6690 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 16 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input connector
for:
• 11D/10, 11D/11 expansion units
Power cord 6691 description
This option is the 200-240 V ac, 15 A, 4.3 m (14 ft.) power cord with an IEC 320-C19 machine input connector
and NEMA 6-15P wall plug for:
• Expansion units 5074, 5079, 5094, 5294, 8079, 8093, 8094, 9079, 9094, 9194
Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units
This topic provides the power loading requirements and proper loading sequence for the 7188 or 9188 power
distribution unit.
Rack-mounted 7188 or 9188 power distribution unit
The 7188 or 9188 rack-mounted power distribution unit (PDU) contains 12 IEC 320-C13 outlets connected to
six 20 A circuit breakers (two outlets per circuit breaker). The PDU employs an inlet current that allows a
variety of power cord options that are listed in the following chart. Based on the power cord that is used, the
PDU can supply from 4.8 kVa to 19.2 kVa.
Table 1. Power cord options
Feature
code
Power cord description
KVa
available
6489
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 3-phase, UTG0247, IEC309 32 A 3P+N+G 21.0
plug
6491
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, IEC309 63 A
P+N+G plug
9.6
6492
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, IEC309 60 A
2P+G plug
9.6
6653
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 3-phase, UTG0247, IEC309 16A 3P+N+G 9.6
plug
6654
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, Plug type 12
plug
4.8
6655
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, Plug type 40
plug
4.8
Determine power cord, plug, and receptacle type
255
Planning
6656
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, IEC309 32 A
P+N+G plug
4.8
6657
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, Plug type PDL
plug
4.8
6658
Power cord, PDU to wall, 4.3 m (14 ft.), 200 - 240 V ac, UTG0247, Plug type KP
plug
4.8
Loading requirements
The power loading of the 7188 or 9188 PDU must follow these rules:
1. Total power load connected to the PDU must be limited to below the kVa listed in the table.
2. Total power load connected to any one circuit breaker must be limited to 16 A (derating of circuit
breaker).
3. Total power load connected to any one IEC320-C13 outlet must be limited to 10 A.
Note: The load on the PDU when a dual line configuration is used will only be half the total load of the system.
When calculating the power load on the PDU, you must include the total power load of each drawer even if
the load is distributed over two PDUs.
Proper loading sequence
1. Collect power requirements for all units that will be connected to the 7188 or 9188 PDU. See Server
specifications for specific power requirements.
2. Sort list by total power required from highest power draw to lowest power draw.
3. Connect highest power drawer to outlet 1 on circuit breaker 1.
4. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 3 on circuit breaker 2.
5. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 5 on circuit breaker 3.
6. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 7 on circuit breaker 4.
7. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 9 on circuit breaker 5.
8. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 11 on circuit breaker 6.
9. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 12 on circuit breaker 6.
10. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 10 on circuit breaker 5.
11. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 8 on circuit breaker 4.
12. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 6 on circuit breaker 3.
13. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 4 on circuit breaker 2.
14. Connect next highest power drawer to outlet 2 on circuit breaker 1.
Following these rules will allow the load to be distributed more evenly across the six PDU circuit breakers.
Ensure that your total power load is below the maximum listed in the table and that each circuit breaker is not
loaded above 15 A.
256
Power load calculating for 7188 or 9188 power distribution units
Planning
PDU load sequence schematic
Plan for cables
This topic helps you plan your layout by presenting planning information on some cables used to interconnect
the system units and devices. This topic includes information on cable length and measuring techniques and
some sample cable planning charts.
You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length, considering not only your current needs, but
also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel.
To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your office layout.
You are responsible for planning for the installation if interconnecting cables, including the proper lightning
and surge protection as necessary and should contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance,
as required. If the cables specified herein do not meet your needs, talk to your seller or cabling vendor about
custom cabling alternatives.
Cabling considerations
• General cabling considerations
• Measuring cables
• Special considerations for model ESCALA PL 6450R cabling
• Determining cable requirements and ordering cables
• High-speed link
• Labels for cabling
General cabling considerations
Cabling can be fairly complex. You have to purchase, install, label, and test all your own workstation cables.
These are cables to your server, PCs, display stations, and printers. Without cables, however, a server cannot
exist. What you really have is a system of cables, connecting everything together. And, if your cables cause
Plan for cables
257
Planning
problems, your server goes down. Because cables are critical to your business, you should purchase
pre-assembled cables rather than assemble the cables yourself.
If you ordered a Total System Package with one or more display stations, you will get one 6 m (20 ft.) cable
with your server. If you ordered one or more printers, you will get one 6 m (20 ft.) cable. You have to order any
additional cables.
When you map out where your cables will run:
• Do not create a safety hazard. Do not route cables where they can harm personnel and equipment.
For instance, make sure people can not trip over cables.
• Do not expose a cable to damage. Do not route cables near a heat source or where they can be
pinched (like under a door).
• Avoid sources of electrical interference. Do not route cables near electric motors or transformers.
• Be careful not to exceed the bend radius of the cable. This is especially true for the high-speed link
cables.
• Do not lay cables over sharp edges, the weight of the cable along with vibrations will eventually wear
through the cable.
Measuring cables
Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do not guess or estimate
your cable lengths.
To determine the cable lengths that you need, be sure to consider the following:
• Length allowed for service access, on both server and device ends
• Length from server to floor
♦ Tabletop to floor for desktop models
♦ 46 mm (1.5 ft.) for deskside models
• Horizontal and vertical cable runs. Be sure to route cables around furniture to avoid tripping hazards.
• Distance from floor to device. (This can include distance between floors, between buildings, and so
on, depending on the complexity of the installation.
For the model ESCALA PL 6450R, the length of the RIO-G cable is a limiting factor in determining the
distance between the server and a separately powered I/O frame. For details, see Special considerations for
model ESCALA PL 6450R cabling.
Special considerations for model ESCALA PL 6450R cabling
The 8 m (26 ft.) RIO-G cable is a limiting factor in determining the distance between the server frame and a
separately powered I/O frame. The RIO-G cables are the communication cables that connect the server to the
I/O drawers. Up to 2 m (6.5 ft.) of the cable length is needed to exit the server frame. An additional 2 m (6.5
ft.) may be required to connect the I/O drawer in the I/O frame, depending on the position of the drawer in the
frame. The additional cable length to go horizontally between the two frames is approximately 1 m (3.2 ft.)
even with the frames touching. This leaves approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) to use under a raised floor or to space
the server frame and I/O frame further apart.
258
General cabling considerations
Planning
Determining cable requirements and ordering cables
You will need to order, install, label, and test all your own workstation cables. These are cables to your
servers, towers, PCs, display stations, and printers. Since assembling cables can be complex, it is
recommended that you purchase pre-assembled cables.
For information on high-speed link cabling, see High speed link information.
If you ordered a package with one or more display stations, you will get one 6 m (20 ft.) cable with your
server. If you ordered one or more printers, you will get one 6 m (20 ft.) cable. You must order any additional
cables separately.
Follow this procedure to order your cables:
1. From the site plan that you drew, determine how much cable you need. See Measuring cables to
determine the length of cables that you will need.
2. Select the types of cables to view specifications and part numbers:
♦ High speed link cables
3. Write down the type and quantity of cables you need in the Workstation Information Form 3B.
4. Using the information you entered in the form, order your cables. Make sure you specify:
♦ Type of cable (for instance, twinaxial)
♦ Lengths and quantity of cable (such as, ten 6-foot cables, and so on)
♦ Type of covering if applicable (like vinyl covered twinaxial cables)
Remember to order any necessary cable accessories, such as adapters and T-connectors.
For more details on cables, contact an authorized service provider.
HSL, SPCN, and RIO cable planning
The following table shows the high speed link (HSL) cable descriptions and feature code numbers available
for your servers and expansion units.
HSL cables
Cable
Number
HSL - 3 m (9.8 ft.)
1460
HSL - 6 m (19.7 ft.)
1462
HSL - 15 m (49.2 ft.)
1462
HSL - 6 m (19.7 ft.)
1470
HSL - 30 m (98.4 ft.)
1471
HSL - 100 m (328 ft.)
1472
HSL - 250 m (820.2 ft.)
1473
HSL to HSL2 - 6 m (19.7 ft.)
1474
HSL to HSL2 - 10 m (32.8 ft.)
1475
HSL2 - 1 m (3.28 ft.)
1481
HSL2 - 3.5 m (11.5 ft.)
1482
HSL2 - 10 m (32.8 ft.)
1483
HSL2 - 15 m (49.2 ft.)
1485
Determining cable requirements and ordering cables
259
Planning
The following table shows the SPCN cable descriptions and feature code numbers available for your servers
and expansion units.
SPCN cables
Cable
Number
SPCN - 2 m (6.6 ft.)
1463
SPCN - 6 m (19.7 ft.)
1464
SPCN - 15 m (49.2 ft.)
1465
SPCN - 30 m (98.4 ft.)
1466
The following table shows the RIO cable descriptions and feature code numbers available for your servers
and expansion units.
RIO cables
Cable
Number
RIO - 1.2 m (3.9 ft.)
3146
RIO - 3.5 m (11.5 ft.)
3147
RIO - 1.75 m (5.7 ft.)
3156
RIO - 10 m (32.8 ft.)
3148
RIO - 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)
3168
HSL handling requirements
The cables are included with protective coverings (end caps) over the connectors. The purpose of these end
caps is to protect the cable ends from mechanical damage and contact contamination. Keep the end caps on
while routing cables, etc. until it is time to plug the connectors into the equipment.
Excess cable may be coiled. The recommended bend radius is 152.4 mm (6 in.); however, the minimum bend
radius is 76.2 mm (3 in.). If cable ties or other restraining devices are used to hold the coiled cable in place,
make sure these fit loosely on the cable jacket. In general, do not compress or crush the cables. This might
result in mechanical damage to the wires and insulation.
Workstation Information Form 3B
Part number Device type Device
description
260
Device
location
Cable
length
Plug type/Input
voltage
Telephone
contact
Determining cable requirements and ordering cables
Planning
High speed link information
High speed link (HSL) cables connect system units to I/O towers and other system units.
High speed link OptiConnect Loop is the designation for an HSL loop which connects multiple systems. It
provides system-to-system connectivity and switch disk environments.
Plan for HSL cabling
High speed link cable options and loop maximums Contains HSL cables and lists the maximum loops for each
server.
High speed link terminology Provides definitions for some of the common terms used in HSL cabling
information.
HSL and SPCN cable planning guide Lists cables and also contains cable planning diagrams.
For server HSL example configurations, see Examples: RIO/HSL connections.
For server SPCN example configurations, see Examples: SPCN connections.
For server HSL configuration and installation information, see Setting up expansion units.
High speed link information
261
Planning
High speed link cable options and loop maximums
The following tables show the high speed link (HSL) cables available for the system units, expansion units
and the maximum number of expansion units on an HSL loop.
Cable options for the server hardware
Cable feature
Cable name
ESCALA PL 250T/R and
ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+
1307
1.75 m (5.7 ft.) HSL-2 cable
X
1474
6 m (19.7 ft.) HSL to HSL-2 cable
X
1475
10 m (32.8 ft.) HSL to HSL-2 cable
X
1481
1.2 m (3.2 ft. )HSL-2 cable
X
1482
4 m (13.1 ft.)HSL-2 cable
X
1483
10 m (32.8 ft.) HSL-2 cable
X
1485
15 m (49.2 ft.) HSL-2 cable
X
Fiber Optic
see note 1
1470
6 m (19.7 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
1471
30 m (98.4 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
1472
100 m (328 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
1473
250 m (820.2 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
Note:
1. Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
Cable options for the expansion units available with server hardware
Cable feature
Cable name
5078 5079 5095 5088 5294
0578 8079 0595 0588 8094
Copper
1460
3 m (9.8 ft.) HSL copper cable
X
X
1461
6 m (19.7 ft.) HSL copper cable
X
X
1462
15 m (49.2 ft.) HSL copper cable
X
X
1474
6 m (19.7 ft.) HSL to HSL-2 cable
X
X
X
X
X
1475
10 m (32.8 ft.) HSL to HSL-2 cable
X
X
X
X
X
1482
4 m (13.1 ft.) HSL-2 cable
X
X
X
1483
10 m (32.8 ft.) HSL-2 cable
X
X
X
X
X
X
1485
15 m (49.2 ft.) HSL-2 cable
Optical
see notes
1470
6 m (19.7 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
X
X
X
X
1471
30 m (98.4 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
X
X
X
X
1472
100 m (328 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
X
X
X
X
1473
250 m (820.2 ft.) HSL fiber optic cable
X
X
X
X
X
250 m (820.2 ft.) Fiber Optic SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
SPCN
0369
262
High speed link information
Planning
1463
2 m (6.6 ft.) SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
1464
6 m (19.7 ft.) SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
1465
15 m (49.2 ft.) SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
1466
30 m (98.4 ft.) SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
1468
100 m (328 ft.) Fiber Optic SPCN cable
X
X
X
X
X
Note:
• Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the expansion unit.
• Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
Maximum expansion units on an HSL loop for server hardware
System Maximums
520 570
HSL loops
1
2
HSL loops supporting fiber optic cables
0
1
I/O expansion units
6
12
HSL migration expansion unit
0
0
6
6
HSL Loop Maximums
I/O expansion units
Note:
• Optical cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the expansion unit.
• Fiber optic cable requires a base or feature optical HSL port card in the system.
High speed link terminology
The following list provides the terminology used for high speed link cabling.
• Alternate server: For a given tower, the server to which a tower can be switched.
• Base tower: Same as power-controlled tower.
• Central electronics complex (CEC) node: A node which is the hub for a server.
• External tower: An I/O tower which is contained within a physical package separate from a CEC. Note
that more than one external tower might be contained within a single physical package (for example,
a 5079 tower is actually two external towers).
• Home server: Same as power-controlling server.
• HSL: High-speed link technology. A high-speed connection mechanism that takes advantage of the
I/O bus structure or the memory to connect multiple systems or partitions.
• HSL loop segment: A portion of an HSL loop whose endpoints are defined by two CEC nodes
(servers) and which contains only I/O nodes.
• Internal tower: An I/O tower which is contained within the same physical package as a server.
• I/O node: A node which is the bridge to an I/O tower (internal or external) or IXS tower.
High speed link information
263
Planning
• Managing server: Same as owning server.
• Node: An addressable entity on an HSL loop.
• Owning server: The server which is currently responsible for accessing and controlling a tower.
• Power-controlling server: For a given tower, the server which has system power control network
(SPCN) control over that tower.
• Power-controlled tower: For a given system, a tower over which that system has SPCN control.
• Private tower: A tower which is not switchable.
• Switchable tower: A tower which has been configured to allow it to be owned by an alternate system.
• Switched tower: A tower which is currently owned by the alternate system.
Labeling cables
Labeling the cables you install helps you keep track of which cable goes where. You can use these label
templates to label your cables. Print them, fill in the information, and tape a label to each end of each cable.
The label contains all the information you need to know about the cable and where it should be connected.
For an example of the information on a label, see Label templates.
Label templates
Connect this end to: Other end connects to:
Device type/name
Location
Device address
Socket/port
SX21
9920
Connect this end to: Other end connects to:
Device type/name
Location
Device address
Socket/port
SX21
9920
Connect this end to: Other end connects to:
264
Labeling cables
Planning
Device type/name
Location
Device address
Socket/port
SX21
9920
Specifications for rack installation
This topic provides requirements and specifications for 19-inch racks used by certain systems. These
requirements and specifications are provided as an aid to help you understand the requirements to install
certain systems into these racks. It is your responsibility, working with your rack manufacturer, to ensure that
the rack chosen meets the requirements and specifications listed here.
Rack specifications
The general rack specifications are:
1. The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks published August 24,
1992. The EIA-310-D standard specifies internal dimensions, for example, the width of the rack
opening (width of the chassis), the width of the module mounting flanges, the mounting hole spacing,
and the depth of the mounting flanges. The EIA-310-D standard does not control the overall external
width of the rack. There are no restrictions on the location of side walls and corner posts relative to
the internal mounting space.
The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.), and the rail-mounting
holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) apart on center (horizontal width between
vertical columns of holes on the two front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges).
Rail-mounting holes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.
Figure 1. Top View of Rack Specifications Dimensions Top view of rack specifications dimensions
The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of three holes spaced (from
bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67 mm (0.5 in.) on center (making
each three hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45 mm (1.75 in.) apart on center). The front and rear
mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3 in.) apart and the internal width
bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494 mm (19.45 in.), for the rails to fit in your rack or cabinet
(see Figure 1).
Specifications for rack installation
265
Planning
Rack specifications dimensions, top front view
Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view
2. The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg (35 lb.) of product
weight per EIA unit.
For example, a four EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140 lb.).
3. Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly recommended to use a
power distribution unit that meets the same specifications as power distribution units to supply rack
power (for example, feature code 7188). Each power distribution unit installed in a rack requires a
dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A. Rack or cabinet power distribution device(s) must
meet the drawer power requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected
to the same power distribution device.
The rack or cabinet power receptacle (power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, or
multi-outlet strip) must have a compatible plug type for your drawer or device.
Note: Refer to the sales manual for 0551, 0553, or 7014 racks if you want to use power distribution
units that are designed for 7014 racks. The customer is responsible for ensuring the power
distribution unit is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes responsibility for any and all
agency certifications required.
4. The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a secure and snug fit of
the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet rail mounting holes. It is strongly
recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with the product be used to install it in the rack.
The mounting rails that ship with products have been designed and tested to safely support the
product during operation and service activities as well as to safely support the weight of your drawer
or device. The rails must facilitate service access by allowing the drawer to be safely extended, if
necessary, forwards, backwards, or both. Some rails provide drawer specific anti-tip brackets, rear
lock-down brackets, and cable management guides that require clearance on the rear side of the
rails.
Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes on the mounting flanges, a plug-in hole adapter may be
required.
266
Specifications for rack installation
Planning
At a minimum, mounting rails must be able to support four times the maximum rated product weight in
its worst-case position (fully-extended front and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic
failure.
5. The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the front and rear of the
rack, or have another means of preventing the rack/cabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is
pulled into its extreme front or rear service positions.
Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely bolted to the floor,
ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heavy row of racks or cabinets.
6. There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the rack or cabinet).
The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front and rear to allow the
drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the rear service access positions (typically this
requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance in both the front and rear).
If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide unrestrained access for
service or be easily removable. If doors must be removed for service, it is the customer's
responsibility to remove them prior to service.
7. The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.
There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be opened and closed,
according to the product specifications.
Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203 mm (8 in.) rear, door to
mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front, 571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side
clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see Figure 1).
8. The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.
For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front door. If the rack or
cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that there is proper front-to-back airflow to
maintain the required drawer ambient inlet temperature as specified in the server specifications. The
perforations should yield at least 34 percent minimum open area per square inch.
Special considerations for mounting a model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ into a rack
The following graphics show the routing path of the model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ flex assembly in
an Enterprise rack. The front flex assembly extends outside of the rail mounting flanges by 70 mm (2.75 in.).
The rear flex assembly extends outside of the rail mounting flanges by 25 mm (1.0 in.). A rack must have this
additional space to properly install the flex assembly and to adequately protect the assembly from physical
damage.
Specifications for rack installation
267
Planning
Figure 2. Routing path for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ flex assembly (front view)
Figure 3. Routing path for model ESCALA PL 850R/PL 1650R/R+ flex assembly (rear view)
General safety requirements for products installed in a rack or cabinet
The general safety requirements for products installed in racks are:
1. Any product or component that plugs into either an power distribution unit or mains power (via a
power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac or 60 V dc (considered to be hazardous voltage) must
be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for the country in which it will
be installed.
Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or cabinet (if it contains
electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan trays, power distribution unit, uninterruptible
power supplies, multi-outlet strips, or any other products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect
to hazardous voltage.
Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the U.S.:
♦ UL
♦ ETL
♦ CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)
Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:
♦ UL (Ulc mark)
♦ ETL (ETLc mark)
♦ CSA
The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity (DOC).
Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the product or product label.
However, proof of certification must be made available upon request. Proof consists of such items as
copies of the NRTL license or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL
mark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL publication, or a copy of
the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the manufacturers name, product type and model, standard
to which it was certified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list
of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer's Declaration is not proof of
certification by an NRTL.
2. The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal requirements for the country
in which it is installed.
268
Specifications for rack installation
Planning
The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60 V dc or 42 V ac,
energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or hot surfaces).
3. There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each product in the rack,
including any power distribution unit.
A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the power cord is no longer
than 1.8 m (6 ft.)), the appliance inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a detachable type), or a power
on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on the rack, provided all power is removed from the
rack or product by the disconnect device.
If the rack/or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the rack must have an
accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.
4. The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips, and products installed in the rack or
cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.
There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the power distribution unit or rack
plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on the products installed in the
rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable country's electric code (such as NEC or CEC).
Ground continuity can be verified by your service personnel, after the installation is completed, and
should be verified prior to the first service activity.
5. The voltage rating of the power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the
products plugged into them.
The power distribution unit or multi-outlet strips current and power ratings are rated at 80 percent of
the building supply circuit (as required by the National Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical
Code). The total load connected to the power distribution unit must be less than the rating of the
power distribution unit. For example, a power distribution unit with a 30 A connection will be rated for
a total load of 24 A (30 A x 80 percent). Therefore, the sum of all equipment connected to the power
distribution unit in this example must be lower than the 24 A rating.
If an uninterruptible power supply is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements
as described for a power distribution unit (including certification by an NRTL).
6. The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, multi-outlet strips and all
products in the rack or cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and in
accordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.
The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, multi-outlet strips and all
products in the rack or cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer's
product documentation and marketing literature).
7. All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible
power supply, and all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be available
on-site.
8. If there is more than one source of power in the rack cabinet, there must be clearly visible safety
labels for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languages required for the country in which the product is
installed).
9. If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight labels applied by the
manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the languages required for the country in which
the product is installed.
10. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition and must meet the
applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick
are considered to comply.
Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 or better. If glass is used
(such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood shelves are used in the rack/cabinet, they
must be treated with a UL Listed flame-retardant coating.
11. The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all requirements for "safe to service" (contact your
Installation Planning Representative for assistance in determining if the environment is safe).
There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.
Elevated service installations, where the product(s) to be serviced are installed between 1.5 m and
3.7 m (5 ft. and 12 ft.) above the floor, require the availability of an OSHA- and CSA-approved
nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder is required for service, the customer must supply the OSHAand CSA- approved nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with the
local Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (9 ft.) above the floor require a Special Bid
to be completed before they can be serviced by service personnel.
Specifications for rack installation
269
Planning
For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced, the products and parts that will be
replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4 kg (25 lb.) (contact your Installation
Planning Representative if in doubt).
There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing of any of the product(s)
installed in the racks (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).
270
Specifications for rack installation
Technical publication remarks form
Title :
ESCALA POWER5 Hardware Information Planning
Reference Nº :
86 A1 04EW 00
Date:
July 2006
ERRORS IN PUBLICATION
SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT TO PUBLICATION
Your comments will be promptly investigated by qualified technical personnel and action will be taken as required.
If you require a written reply, please include your complete mailing address below.
NAME :
COMPANY :
ADDRESS :
Please give this technical publication remarks form to your BULL representative or mail to:
Bull - Documentation Dept.
1 Rue de Provence
BP 208
38432 ECHIROLLES CEDEX
FRANCE
[email protected]
Date :
Technical publications ordering form
To order additional publications, please fill in a copy of this form and send it via mail to:
BULL CEDOC
357 AVENUE PATTON
B.P.20845
49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01
FRANCE
CEDOC Reference #
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
_ _
_ _
_ _ _ _
_
[ _ _ ]
[ _ _ ]
Phone:
FAX:
E-Mail:
+33 (0) 2 41 73 72 66
+33 (0) 2 41 73 70 66
[email protected]
Designation
Qty
: The latest revision will be provided if no revision number is given.
NAME:
Date:
COMPANY:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
E-MAIL:
For Bull Subsidiaries:
Identification:
For Bull Affiliated Customers:
Customer Code:
For Bull Internal Customers:
Budgetary Section:
For Others: Please ask your Bull representative.
FAX:
BLANK
BULL CEDOC
357 AVENUE PATTON
B.P.20845
49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01
FRANCE
REFERENCE
86 A1 04EW 00
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement